Revelation 2:10 — Word Study
N1904μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ δή μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
BSAnothingmēdeis do fearphobeō▸ [be alarmed or intimidated] whathos, hē you are aboutmellō▸ to suffer;paschō▸ [experience pain or hardship] Beholdhoraō▸ indeeddē is aboutmellō▸ to castballō▸ [cast with force] theho devildiabolos [the adversary, Satan] [some] ofek yousu intoeis prisonphulakē [a place of confinement or testing] so thathina you may be tested,peirazō▸ [try or prove] andkai you will haveechō▸ [endure] tribulationthlipsis [pressure or affliction] for dayshēmera ten.deka [a decade, a period of testing] do beginomai▸ faithfulpistos [loyal, trustworthy] untoachri death,thanatos [physical or spiritual] andkai I will givedidōmi▸ [bestow, grant] to yousu theho crownstephanos [a wreath, a symbol of honor] <the>ho of life.zōē [eternal, spiritual existence]
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| μηδὲν | nothing | Adjective, accusative, singular |
| φοβοῦ | do fear | Verb, present, no voice stated |
| ἃ | what | Relative pronoun, accusative, plural |
| μέλλεις | you are about | Verb, present, active |
| πάσχειν· | to suffer; | Verb, second aorist, active |
| ἰδοὺ | Behold | Verb, second aorist, middle |
| δή | indeed | Particle |
| μέλλει | is about | Verb, present, active |
| βάλλειν | to cast | Verb, second aorist, active |
| ὁ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| διάβολος | devil | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ἐξ | [some] of | Preposition |
| ὑμῶν | you | Personal pronoun, second person, genitive |
| εἰς | into | Preposition |
| φυλακὴν | prison | Noun, accusative, singular |
| ἵνα | so that | Conjunction |
| πειρασθῆτε, | you may be tested, | Verb, aorist, passive |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| ἕξετε | you will have | Verb, future, active |
| θλῖψιν | tribulation | Noun, accusative, singular |
| ἡμερῶν | for days | Noun, genitive, plural |
| δέκα. | ten. | Adjective, nominative |
| γίνου | do be | Verb, present, no voice stated |
| πιστὸς | faithful | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ἄχρι | unto | Adverb |
| θανάτου, | death, | Noun, genitive, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| δώσω | I will give | Verb, future, active |
| σοι | to you | Personal pronoun, second person, dative |
| τὸν | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| στέφανον | crown | Noun, accusative, singular |
| τῆς | <the> | Article, genitive, singular |
| ζωῆς. | of life. | Noun, genitive, singular |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | Do not fear what you are about to suffer. Look, the devil is about to throw some of you into prison to test you, and you will suffer tribulation for ten days. Be faithful even unto death, and I will give you the crown of life. |
| KJV | Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer: behold, the devil shall cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days: be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life. |
| ASV | Fear not the things which thou art about to suffer: behold, the devil is about to cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee the crown of life. |
| YLT | 'Be not afraid of the things that thou art about to suffer; lo, the devil is about to cast of you to prison, that ye may be tried, and ye shall have tribulation ten days; become thou faithful unto death, and I will give to thee the crown of the life. |
| WEB | Don’t be afraid of the things which you are about to suffer. Behold, the devil is about to throw some of you into prison, that you may be tested; and you will have oppression for ten days. Be faithful to death, and I will give you the crown of life. |
| BBE | Have no fear of the things which you will have to undergo: see, the Evil One will send some of you into prison, so that you may be put to the test; and you will have great trouble for ten days. Be true till death, and I will give you the crown of life. |
Where they part company is φοβοῦ — see How Translations Differ.
The sentence consists of a main clause followed by several subordinate clauses that provide details about the suffering and the promise given.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectὁ
verbφοβέω
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Revelation 2:10
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — The Letter to the Church in Smyrnagenerated
Revelation 2:10 is part of a letter written to the church in Smyrna, a community facing persecution. Jesus acknowledges their suffering and encourages them to remain faithful despite the trials they will face. The promise of a 'crown of life' serves as a reminder of the eternal reward that awaits those who endure in their faith. This message resonates with the broader theme of perseverance found throughout the New Testament, particularly in the face of tribulation, as seen in Romans 5:3-5.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Matthew 10:22 | You will be hated by everyone because of My name, but the one who perseveres to the end will be saved. |
| 2 | Daniel 3:16–18 | Shadrach, Meshach, and Abednego replied to the king, “O Nebuchadnezzar, we have no need to answer you in this matter. |
| 3 | Matthew 10:28 | Do not be afraid of those who kill the body but cannot kill the soul. Instead, fear the One who can destroy both soul and body in hell. |
| 4 | Luke 12:4–7 | I tell you, My friends, do not be afraid of those who kill the body and after that can do no more. |
| 5 | Revelation 12:9–11 | And the great dragon was hurled down—that ancient serpent called the devil and Satan, the deceiver of the whole world. He was hurled to the earth, and his angels with him. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 27 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — στέφανον, stephanosgenerated
The word στέφανος is a noun meaning 'crown' and is often associated with victory or honor. It is derived from the verb meaning 'to encircle' and typically refers to a wreath given to victors in athletic competitions.
In this context, it symbolizes the reward of eternal life promised to those who remain faithful unto death. The use of this term highlights the idea of perseverance through trials and the ultimate victory over death, echoing themes found in other New Testament passages, such as 2 Timothy 4:8.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The verse is translated in the Berean Standard Bible as 'Do not fear what you are about to suffer.' This wording is also reflected in the ASV and KJV, which similarly convey the message of not fearing impending suffering.
However, the WEB uses 'Don’t be afraid of the things which you are about to suffer,' which maintains the same essential meaning but varies slightly in phrasing. Overall, the translations agree on the core message of encouragement and assurance.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb in the verse is φοβοῦ, do fear, which governs the imperative command not to fear. Several phrases follow, including a clause describing what they are about to suffer, and a promise of reward for faithfulness.
The structure includes multiple clauses: the first addresses the readers directly, the second describes the impending trials, and the last offers the assurance of a reward, creating a clear progression from warning to encouragement.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
στέφανος appears in the Septuagint as a translation of Hebrew words for 'crown' or 'wreath', often used in contexts relating to honor and victory. This connection enriches the understanding of the term in Revelation 2:10, where it symbolizes the reward for enduring faith.
The use of στέφανος in the LXX highlights the continuity of the theme of reward for faithfulness from the Old Testament to the New Testament, reinforcing the idea of eternal life as a divine promise.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Revelation 2:10 tells the church in Smyrna not to fear the suffering they are about to face, as the devil will throw some of them into prison for testing. They are encouraged to be faithful even to death, with the promise of receiving the crown of life.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
Being faithful unto death means remaining loyal and committed to one's beliefs and faith in God, even in the face of persecution or death, as emphasized in this verse.
The crown of life symbolizes the eternal reward and honor given to those who persevere in their faith, representing victory over trials and the promise of eternal life.
Jesus encourages the church not to fear because He understands their suffering and assures them that their faithfulness will be rewarded, providing them with strength to endure.
This message encourages believers today to remain steadfast in their faith despite challenges, trusting in God's promise of eternal life and reward for their perseverance.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- In what areas of my life do I need to exercise faithfulness, even in the face of difficulty?
- How can I encourage others who are facing trials to remain steadfast in their faith?
- What does the promise of the crown of life mean to me personally?
- How can I prepare myself spiritually to face challenges that may come my way?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
Early church fathers referenced this verse to encourage believers in their faithfulness amid trials. Their comments highlight the importance of perseverance and the promise of eternal life.
Nay, then, He does even choose. He calls us to it. To him who conquers He says, "I will give a crown Of life." Be you, too, faithful unto death, and fight you, too, the good fight,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 2 →
What fear would it be better to understand (as here meant), than that which gives rise to denial? What love does he assert to be perfect, but that which puts fear to flight,Early Church Fathers on Revelation 2 →
Although I know, dearest brethren, that you have frequently been admonished in my letters to manifest all care for those who with a glorious voice have confessed the Lord, and are confined in prison;Early Church Fathers on Revelation 2 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Revelation 2:10 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleFear none of those things which thou shalt suffer,.... God's people undergo sufferings of various sorts, as the Christians of those times did, scourgings, imprisonment, confiscation of goods, and
Read John Gill on Revelation 2 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryFear none of those things which thou shalt suffer: behold, the devil shall cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days: be thou faithful unto death, and
Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 2 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleFear none of those things which thou shalt suffer; thou art like to suffer yet sharper things than thou hast suffered, the persecutions are but begun; but pluck up a good courage, fear not your enemies, . Behold, the devil shall cast some of you into prison; you shall be cast into prison, by Jews and pagans, who are the devil’ s instruments, and execute his malice against you; which should both encourage you, that your fight is with the common enemy of mankind, and teach you to pity and pray for your persecutors, who are but the devil’ s instruments, whose hearts he hath filled with malice against you. That ye may be tried; that your faith, love, patience, obedience, may be tried. And ye…
Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 2 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments10 Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer: behold, the devil shall cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days: be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life. Ver. 10. Fear none of those things] Quit thy heart of that cowardly passion, and die rather than deny the truth. Put on that resolution, Necesse esse ut eam, non ut vivam, Duty must be done, though I die for it. Behold, the devil] viz. By his imps and instruments whom he acts and agitates, Ephesians 2:2. But he and his are overruled and limited; for he shall cast some of you, not all of you, into prison, not into hell, that ye may be tried, not destroyed…
Read John Trapp on Revelation 2 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(10) Fear none of those things.—Though Christ proclaimed His yoke to be easy, He also said that His followers must expect tribulation (John 16:33). He never conceals the difficulties or dangers of His service. (See Matthew 10:16-31; Acts 9:16.) So here He proclaims, “Behold, the devil shall cast some. . . .” The devil.—The LXX. translation gives this name to Satan, regarding him as the “accuser.” (See Job 1:6; Zechariah 3:1-2; and comp. Revelation 12:10, where he is described as the “accuser of the brethren.”) Tried.—On the part of the adversary, the intention was that they might be tempted from their allegiance to Christ. The real effect would be that they who endured would come forth…
Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 2 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 10. Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer] This may be addressed particularly to Polycarp, if he was at that time the bishop of this Church. He had much to suffer; and was at last burnt alive at Smyrna, about the year of our Lord 166. We have a very ancient account of his martyrdom, which has been translated by Cave, and is worthy of the reader's perusal. That account states that the Jews were particularly active in this martyrdom, and brought the fagots, c., by which he was consumed. Such persons must indeed have been of the synagogue of Satan. Ten days] As the days in this book are what is commonly called prophetic days, each answering to a year, the ten years of…
Read AdamClarke on Revelation 2 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges10. Fear none of] Read simply Fear not.those things which thou shalt suffer] Probably refer primarily to a persecution immediately impending; but they are no doubt meant to apply also to the subsequent persecutions of the Church there, especially to the famous one, under the Antonines, in which Polycarp the Bishop suffered martyrdom, in a.d. 155. It will depend on the date assigned to this Book, whether Polycarp can have been Bishop at the time of this message. It is to be noted that the Jews were specially active in urging his execution, though officially it was the act of the pagan magistrates.that ye may be tried] Or, tempted: it is probably rather the Devil’s object in raising the…
Read Cambridge on Revelation 2 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleFear none of those things which thou shalt suffer - He did not promise them exemption from suffering. He saw that they were about to suffer, and he specifies the manner in which their affliction would occur.
Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 2 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
Do not fear what you are about to suffer. Look, the devil is about to throw some of you into prison to test you, and you will suffer tribulation for ten days. Be faithful even unto death, and I will give you the crown of life.
Don’t be afraid of the things which you are about to suffer. Behold, the devil is about to throw some of you into prison, that you may be tested; and you will have oppression for ten days. Be faithful to death, and I will give you the crown of life.
Do not fear what you are about to suffer. Behold, the devil is about to throw some of you into prison to test you, and you will suffer tribulation for ten days. Be faithful even unto death, and I will give you the crown of life.
Do not be afraid of the things you are about to suffer. The devil is about to have some of you thrown into prison so you may be tested, and you will experience suffering for ten days. Remain faithful even to the point of death, and I will give you the crown that is life itself.
Tyndale line
Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer: behold, the devil shall cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days: be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life.
Fear not the things which thou art about to suffer: behold, the devil is about to cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee the crown of life.
Fear not the things which thou art about to suffer: behold, the devil is about to cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee the crown of life.
Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer. Behold, the devil will cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful to death, and I will give thee a crown of life.
Feare none of those things, which thou shalt suffer: beholde, it shall come to passe, that the deuill shall cast some of you into prison, that ye may be tryed, and ye shall haue tribulation tenne dayes: be thou faithfull vnto the death, and I will giue thee the crowne of life.
Strictly literal
Fear nothing [of] what thou art about to suffer. Behold, the devil is about to cast of you into prison, that ye may be tried; and ye shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give to thee the crown of life.
'Be not afraid of the things that thou art about to suffer; lo, the devil is about to cast of you to prison, that ye may be tried, and ye shall have tribulation ten days; become thou faithful unto death, and I will give to thee the crown of the life.
Do not be afraid of the things that you are about to suffer; behold, the Devil is about to cast [some] of you into prison, that you may be tried, and you will have tribulation ten days; become faithful to death, and I will give to you the garland of life.
Do not fear what you are about to suffer. Look! The devil is about to throw some of you into prison so that you will be tested, and you will suffer for ten days. Be faithful until death, and I will give you the crown of life.
From the Latin
Fear none of those things which thou shalt suffer. Behold, the devil will cast some of you into prison that you may be tried: and you shall have tribulation ten days. Be thou faithful until death: and I will give thee the crown of life.
Simplified
Don't be afraid about what you are going to suffer. Yes, the devil will throw some of you into prison to test you, and you will suffer persecution for ten days. Just remain faithful, even if it means death, and I will give you the crown of life!
Have no fear of the things which you will have to undergo: see, the Evil One will send some of you into prison, so that you may be put to the test; and you will have great trouble for ten days. Be true till death, and I will give you the crown of life.
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Nihil horum timeas quæ passurus es. Ecce missurus est diabolus aliquos ex vobis in carcerem ut tentemini : et habebitis tribulationem diebus decem. Esto fidelis usque ad mortem, et dabo tibi coronam vitæ.
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܒܡܕܡ ܠܐ ܬܕܚܠ ܡܢ ܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܥܬܝܕ ܐܢܬ ܠܡܚܫ ܗܐ ܥܬܝܕ ܐܟܠܩܪܨܐ ܕܢܪܡܐ ܡܢܟܘܢ ܒܒܝܬ ܚܒܘܫܝܐ ܕܬܬܢܣܘܢ ܘܢܗܘܐ ܠܟܘܢ ܐܘܠܨܢܐ ܝܘܡܝܢ ܥܣܪܐ ܗܘܘ ܡܗܝܡܢܐ ܥܕܡܐ ܠܡܘܬܐ ܘܐܬܠ ܠܟܘܢ ܟܠܝܠܐ ܕܚܝܐ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
— φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ — θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
— φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις — ἰδοὺ δή μέλλει — ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
μηδὲν φοβοῦ ἃ μέλλεις πάσχειν· ἰδοὺ — μέλλει — ὁ διάβολος — — εἰς φυλακὴν ἵνα πειρασθῆτε, καὶ ἕξετε θλῖψιν ἡμερῶν δέκα. γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου, καὶ δώσω σοι τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| μηδὲν nothing | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, TR, Byz | WH, Treg |
| πάσχειν· to suffer; | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, TR | Byz |
| δή indeed | Byz | NA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn, TR |
| βάλλειν to cast | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg | TR, Byz |
| ἐξ [some] of | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, Byz | TR |
| ὑμῶν you | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, Byz | TR |
| ἕξετε you will have | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, Treg, TR, Byz | WH |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Revelation 2:10
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
μηδείς is built from μή (not) and εἷς (one), meaning no one or nothing. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often to emphasize absence or negation, as seen in verses like Matthew 8:4 and Acts 4:17. The lexicons do not present significant disagreement on its usage.
μηδείς, -δεμία, -δέν
(and -θέν, Ac 27:33, a Hellenistic form; v. Bl., § 6, 7; Thackeray, Gr., 58),
related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ,
μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν (and μηθέν, Acts xxvii. 33 LT Tr WH, —a form not infreq. fr. Aristot. on [found as early as B.C. 378, ef. Meisterhans, Gr. d. Att. Inschr. p. 73]; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 181sq.; W. § 5, 1d. 11; [B. 28 (25)]; Kiihner § 187, 1 vol. i. 487 sq.), (fr. μηδέ and εἷς), [fr. Hom. down]; it is used either in connection with a noun, no, none, or absolutely, no one, not one, no man, neut. nothing, and in the same constructions as μή; accordingly a. with an imperative: μηδείς being the person to whom something is forbidden, 1 Co. iii. 18, 21; x. 24; Gal. vi.17; Eph. v. 6; Col. ii. 18; 1 Tim. iv.12; Tit. ii.15; Jas.i.13; 1Jn.iii.7; neut. μηδέν, 50. ἔστω [A. V. have thou nothing to do with etc.], Mt. xxvii. 19; μηδείς in the dat. or the acc. depending on the impv., Ro. xiii. 8; 1 Tim. v. 22; μηδέν (accusative), Lk. iii. 13; ix.3; μ. φοβοῦ, Rev. ii. 10 [here L Tr WH txt. μή]. b.…
Read the full entry →μηδείς. According to Thumb ( 7ε]16᾽1. p. 14) the forms μηθείς and οὐθείς appear in the whole Greek world from iv/B.c., and are in wide use at the beginning of the Christian Era, after which they gradually disappear, without leaving any trace in | B Lond’ 42%* (gic: MGr. Weare prepared, therefore, to find that the forms in θ are more frequent in the LXX than in the NT, where there are only a few examples of οὐθείς (principally in the Lucan writings), and only one of μηθείς, namely Ac 2733 according to NBA. A few exx. of μηθείς from the papyri will suffice—P Petr II. 11(1)® (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Selections, p- 7) εἰ δυνατόν ἐστιν kal μηθέν σε τῶν ἔργων κωλύει, ΚΕ it is possible and none of your work hinders you,’’ Part V.
μηδείς (mēdeis) — nothing.
μηδείς, μηδεμίᾰ, μηδέν
(i.e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν): feminine μηδὲ ἴα or μηδεΐα (or -έϊα) [Refs]:— not one, not even one, nobody (in neuter nothing), once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. μηδὲ εἷς (so written) is found in Attic dialect Inscrr., as [Refs]not even one, μηδὲ ἕν [Refs 5th c.BC+]: frequently with an intervening Particle or preposition, μηδ᾽ ἂν ἕνα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδ᾽ ὑφ᾽ ἑνός, μηδ᾽ ὑπὸ μιᾶς, [Refs]
II. nobody, naught, good for naught, κἄμ᾽ ἴσον τῷ μ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν as substantive, naught, nothing, κεἰ τὸ μ. ἐξερῶ [Refs]; μ. λέγειν to say what is naught, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of persons, τὸ μ. a good-for-nothing, τὸ μ. εἶναι, of a eunuch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἧττον αὐτοῖς ἔνι ἢ τὸ μ., i.e. it is a mere…
μηδείς, μηδεμία, μηδέν
Adj
no one, nothing
μηδείς mēdeis 90x
not one, none, no one, Mt. 8:4
μηδείς i. e. μηδὲ εἷς, μηδὲ μία, μηδὲ ἕν and not one, related to οὐδείς as μή to οὐ, Il., etc.; —rare in Pl., Xen.
μηδὲ εἷς, which (so written) is never elided even in attic, retained the first emphatic sense not even one, and often had a Particle between, as μηδ᾽ ἂν εἷς, or a prep., μηδ᾽ ἐξ ἑνός, μηδὲ περὶ ἑνός etc., Plat.
nobody, naught, good for naught, ὁ μηδείς Soph.; pl., οὐ γὰρ ἠξίου τοὺς μηδένας id. Soph.:— so, μηδέν or τὸ μηδέν often as Subst., naught, nothing, id. Soph.; μηδὲν λέγειν to say what is naught, Xen.; τοῦ μηδενὸς ἄξιος Hdt.; ἐς τὸ μηδὲν ἥκειν Eur.;—and of persons, τὸ μηδέν a good for naught, τὸ μηδὲν εἶναι of an eunuch, Hdt.; τὸ μ. ὄντας Soph.
Read the full entry →Adj-ASN-N — Adjective · accusative · singular · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
A-ASN-N Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter Negative
nuth'-ing (lo', lo' @me'umah, etc.; medeis, oudeis): "Nothing" is represented by various words and phrases, often with lo', which is properly a substantive with the meaning of "nothing." Most frequently we have lo' me'umah, "not anything" (Ge 40:15; Jud 14:6).
Other forms are lo' dhabhar, "not anything"; (Ge 19:8); lo'khol, "not any(thing)" (Ge 11:6; Pr 13:7); la' (Aramaic), "no," "nothing" (Da 4:35, "as nothing"); 'ephec, "end," "cessation" (Isa 34:12); bilti, "without," "save," "not" (
92 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 90 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 21 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
οὗ χάριν τῆς ἀρίστης αὑτοῦ φύσεως οὐκ ἐφθόνησεν οὐσίᾳ μηδὲν ἐξ αὑτῆς ἐχούσῃ καλόν, δυναμένῃ δὲ πάντα γίνεσθαι.
ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.
ἕως ἔτι τὸ καλὸν σκεῦός ἐστιν μεθ̓ ὑμῶν, μὴ ἐλλείπητε μηδενὶ ἑαυτῶν, ἀλλὰ συνεχῶς ἐκζητεῖτε ταῦτα καὶ ἀναπληροῦτε πᾶσαν ἐντολήν: ἔστιν γὰρ ἄξια.
ἐπελθὼν ἐπίτιμον παραχρῆμα χαλκοῦ τάλαντα ἓξ καὶ ἱερὰς βασιλεῦσι ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου δραχμὰς ρκ καὶ μηθὲν ἧσσον κύριον εἶναι τὰ προγεγραμμένα. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα
τρισχιλίων τριακοσίων · καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Ψενενοῦπιν ἐπὶ τὸν Ἁρσιῆσιν μήτʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ διασαφουμένου μέρους γῆς τρόπῳ μηδενί. εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποτεισάτω Ἁρσιήσει
ἐνλιπὸν μοι ἄπρατον γῆς ἀρουρῶν γ, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαι μήτʼ αὐτὸν Κολλούθην μήδʼ ἄλλον μηδένα ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν Ὧρον μήδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον μηδένα τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ τῶν
φοβέω is derived from φόβος and primarily means to frighten or to be alarmed. It covers a range of meanings from being terrified to having reverential fear, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 10:31 and Luke 1:50. The word is used in both active and passive forms, but in the New Testament, it appears only in the passive sense.
φοβέω, ῶ
(< φόβος)
[in LXX chiefly for ירא ;]
in Hom., to put to flight. Pass., to be put to flight, to flee affrighted
to terrify, frighten (Wis 179; Hdt. and Att..). Pass. (so always in NT; cf. M, Pr., 162), to be seized with fear, be affrighted, fear: Mt 10:31 14:27, Mk 5:33 6:50, Lk 1:13 8:50, Jo 6:19 12:15, Ac 16:38, al.; opp. to ὑψηλοφρονεῖν, Ro 11:20; σφόδρα, Mt 17:6 27:54; c. cogn. acc., φόβον μέγαν, Mk 4:41, Lk 2:9 (I Mac 10:8); φόβον αὐτῶν…
φοβέομαι (act. obsolete): (1) ‘‘fear,’”’ ‘‘dread,’’ (a) absol., P Lips I. 40% (iv/y A.D.) κἀγὼ αὐτὸς φοβοῦμαι, ἐπειδὴ ἀπών ἐστιν ὁ ἑταῖρός μου, OG/S 6659 (i/A.D.) ὅσοι μὲν γὰρ ἐφοβήθησαν ἀκούσαντες περὶ... ; (b) ς. acc., P Oxy II. 237-1 (ap. 186) φοβηθέντας τὸν κίνδυνον, “through fear of the danger’’ (Edd.), P Flor III. 33232 (ii/a.p.) οὔτε προσεκύνησα θεοὺς φοβουμένη σου Td μετέωρον, P Grenf II, 84% (v/vi A.D.) τοὺς νόμους φοβηθεὶς ἔφυγεν εἰς ἐρημίαν (said of a patricide) ; (c) c. μή and conj., P Magd 9® (ili/B.C.) φοβουμένη μὴ συμπέσηι (of a sanctuary in a dangerous state), BGU IV. 10974 (time of Claudius or Nero) (= Olsson, p. 113) φοβοῦμαι yap μὴ σχάσῃ. velv]αυσίακε [γ]άρ, ‘for I am afraid that he will give up, for he has become sick,’’ P Tebt II. 31818 (a.p. 166) φο[βουἹμένη δ[ὲ] μὴ λάθω [κατὰ] τὸ εἴς pe δίκαι[ον] οἰκονομεί[ας, ‘tas I am afraid that my right of procedure may escape…
Read the full entry →φοβέω (phobeō) — to fear.
φοβέω,
3rd.pers. plural imperative φοβεόντων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect imperfect φοβέεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future -ήσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐφόβησα [Refs 8th c.BC+] —passive and middle, Ionic dialect [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect imperative φοβεῦ or φοβέο, [Refs]: Epic dialect 3rd.pers. plural imperfect φοβέοντο [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future φοβήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist passive ἐφοβήθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; aorist middle ἐφοβησάμην only [Refs]: perfect πεφόβημαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]: pluperfect 3rd.pers. plural ἐπεφόβηντο [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect πεφοβήατο [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__A active, in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always in the sense put to flight, [ἴρηξ] ἐφόβησε κολοιούς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; [Ζεὺς] καὶ ἄλκιμον ἄνδρα φοβεῖ[Refs 8th…
φοβέω
phobeo
from 5401; to frighten, i.e. (passively) to be alarmed; by analogy, to
be in awe of, i.e. revere:--be (+ sore) afraid, fear (exceedingly),
reverence.
see GREEK for 5401
φοβέομαι
v.
I fear, am terrified
φοβέομαι phobeomai 95x
has an active form, φοβέω (G5828), but only occurs as a passive (deponent) in our literature, to fear, dread, Mt. 10:26; 14:5; to fear reverentially, to reverence, Mk. 6:20; Lk. 1:50; Acts 10:2; Eph. 5:33; Rev. 11:18; to be afraid to do a thing, Mt. 2:22; Mk. 9:32; to be reluctant, to scruple, Mt. 1:20; to fear, be apprehensive, Read the full entry →
φοβέω φόβος Act. to put to flight, Lat. fugo, Il.
to strike with fear, to terrify, frighten, alarm, Lat. terreo, Hdt., attic; πόνος ὁ μὴ φοβῶν free from alarm, Soph.; φοβήσαντες κατεστήσαντο τὴν πολιτείαν they established it by terror, Plat.
Pass. and Mid. to be put to flight, to flee affrighted, flee, Hom.; φοβηθείς in flight, Il.; ὑπό τινος φοβέεσθαι to flee before him, id. Il.
to be seized with fear, be affrighted, fear, Hdt., attic; φοβεῖσθαι εἴς or πρός τι to be alarmed at a thing, Soph.; ἀμφί τινι to fear about a thing, Hdt.; περί τινος Xen.; περί τινι Thuc., etc.:— φοβεῖσθαι μὴ . . to fear lest a thing will be, Lat. vereri ne . . , Eur., etc.; so, φ. ὅπως μὴ . . Thuc.; so, φοβ. ὅτι . . , ὡς . . to fear that . . , not like Lat. vereri ut . . , id. Thuc., etc.:— φοβ. c. inf. to fear to do, be afraid…
Verb-PNM-2S — Verb · present · no voice stated · imperative · second person · singularpresent no voice stated imperative — an action in progress.
V-PNM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
fer (yir'ah, yare'; phobos, phobeo):
Terms, etc.:
"Fear" is the translation of many words in the Old Testament; the chief are: yir'ah, "fear," "terror," "reverence," "awe," most often "the fear of God," "fear of Yahweh" (Ge 20:11; 2Ch 19:9, etc.); also of "fear" generally (Job 22:4; Isa 7:25; Eze 30:13, etc.); yare', "to be afraid," "to fear," "to reverence" (Ge 15:1; Le 19:3,14; De 6:2, etc.); pachadh, "fear," "terror," "dread" (
→ See COWARDICE
→ Also see FEAR OF GOD, below
95 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 31 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 95 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 189 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἦν γὰρ οἶκος αὐτῷ καὶ πόλις ὁ κόσμος, μηδεμιᾶς χειροποιήτου κατασκευῆς δεδημιουργημένης ἐκ λίθων καὶ ξύλων ὕλης, ᾧ καθάπερ ἐν πατρίδι μετὰ πάσης ἀσφαλείας ἐνδιῃτᾶτο φόβου μὲν ἐκτὸς ὤν, ἅτε τῆς τῶν περιγείων ἡγεμονίας ἀξιωθεὶς καὶ πάντων ὅσα θνητὰ…
Νῶχος δὲ φοβούμενος, μὴ καθʼ ἕκαστον ἔτος ἐπικλύζῃ τὴν γῆν ὁ θεὸς φθορὰν ἀνθρώπων καταψηφισάμενος, ἱερὰ καύσας ἐδεῖτο τὸν θεὸν τοῦ λοιποῦ ἐπὶ τῆς πρώτης μένειν εὐταξίας καὶ μηδὲν ἔτι τοιοῦτον ἐπενεγκεῖν πάθος, ὑφʼ οὗ κινδυνεύσει πᾶν ἀπολέσθαι τὸ τῶν…
λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…
σιος Δωριεὺς Φλελεμούθι πλεῖστα χαίρειν καὶ ὑγιαίνειν. μὴ φοβοῦ περὶ τῶν σκευῶν ὧν ἔχεις ἀλλὰ ἀσφάλισαι, ἂν καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ μεταλλάρχης ἔλθῃ ἐρωτῶν‧
καλ … ν τὴν … τελείαν ἀπόφασιν εἰς τὴν ἐξέτασιν τῶν βιβλίων Ἑρμαίσκου φοβούμενος μὴ ἄρα εὑρεθείη ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐπίληψις ἕνεκα τῆς τοῦ ἐποικίου οἰκειότητος πρὸς τὸν Ἑρμαίσκον.
παρόντος δὲ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ μετεπέμψατο τὸν πατέρα μου καὶ ἐπερώτησεν ὅτι ποῦ ἐστιν. καὶ φοβούμενος μὴ ἐντυχῶ κατὰ αὐτοῦ τῷ ἡγεμόνι ὑπεμνηματίσατο οὕτως β … ἔτους Φαμενὼτ ϛ ἀπαιτῶν
ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,
the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).
As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →
ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…
Read the full entry →ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…
Read the full entry →ὅς (hos, hē) — which.
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,
genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,
__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.
__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…
ὅς ἥ ὅ
hos
he hay, and neuter
ho ho
probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the
relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,
that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),
etc. See also 3757.
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3757
ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
Rel.pr.
who, which, what, that
ὅς hos 1x
who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16
Rel-APN — Relative pronoun · accusative · plural · neuteraccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural neuter.
R-APN Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Neuter
1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·
πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.
Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…
θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση
ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν
τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην
μέλλω is a verb meaning to be about to do something, indicating intention or future action. It can express necessity, probability, or mere intention, often followed by an infinitive. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts suggesting both planned actions and events that are destined to occur, such as in Matthew 2:13 and Acts 12:6. The participle form ὁ μέλλων refers to future things.
μέλλω,
[in LXX: Jb 3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and freq. in Wi, II, IV Mac;]
to be about to be or do;
c. inf. (Bl., § 62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114);
μέλλω ; fut. μελλήσω (Mt. xxiv. 6; and LTTrWH in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. ἔμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31 (exc. T WH); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG) ; vii. 39 (exe. T); xi. 51 (exc. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R pres.); x. 4 (exe. L Tr)] and ἤμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. vil. 2; x. 1 (exe. RG); xix. 4; Jn. iv. 47; xii. 33; xviii. 32; Acts xii. 6 (exc. RGL); xvi. 27 (exe. RG); xxvii 33 (exe. RGT); Heb. xi. 8 (exe. L); ef. reff. s. v. βούλομαι, init. and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15], to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptep., ὁ μέλλων, absol.: τὰ μέλλοντα and τὰ ἐνεστῶτα are contrasted, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; εἰς τὸ μέλλον, for the future, hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see eis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm supplies éros)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; τὰ μέλλοντα, things future, things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more perfect state of things which will exist in the αἰὼν μέλλων…
Read the full entry →μέλλω. In the NT μέλλω is construed 84 times with the pres. cf. P Par 432 (B.C. 154) μέλλω δὲ ἰσάγειν ἐν τῷ μεσορὴ μηνί, 75. 4819. (B.c. 153) καταπλεῖν μέλλομεν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα, P Meyer 209 (1st half iii/A.D.) μέλλι πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἔρχεσθαι, pe σοι ἀεὶ γράφειν, Ὁ ae 11. 416° (iii/ A.D.) μέλλω péve εἰς ᾿Αντινόου, and P Oxy VIII. 11567° (iii/A.p.) μέλλο[με]ν χόρτου χρίαν ἔχιν. For the constr. with the fut. inf., which is obsolete in the NT (cf. TR Ac 233°), cf. Syi/ 432! (B.c. 326-5) ὀμόσασιν. . . [ποιήσεσθαι τὴν] ἐπιτροπὴν καθ᾽ ὅτι ἂν μέλλει ἔσ[εϊσθαι κτλ. Μέλλω followed by the aor. inf. act. is seen in such passages as P Giss I. 125 (ii/A.p.) ὁσάκις ἐὰν μέλλῃς πέμψαι, P Oxy XII. 14$82° (ii/a.p.) ἔμελλον yap ἀνελθεῖν, and 26. VII. 106727 (iii/A.D.) εἰ μέλλεις ἐλθεῖν ἐλθέ, ‘come if you are coming,” and by the aor. inf. pass. in P Goodsp Cairo 310 (iii/B.c.) ἡνίκα fiehioy κοιμηθῆναι ἔγραψα…
Read the full entry →μέλλω (mellō) — to ensue.
μέλλω,
imperfect ἔμελλον and ἤμελλον (see. below), Epic dialect μέλλον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect, Ionic dialect μέλλεσκον [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: future μελλήσω [NT+4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐμέλλησα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive and middle, see below see.—Only present and imperfect in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Lyric poetry, and Trag.: aorist only in Prose (except [Refs 6th c.BC+]imperfect ἤμελλον with long augment is established by the metre in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἠμέλλησα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἤμελλον is not found in earlier Attic dialect Inscrr., but occurs in Papyrus, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I. to be destined or likely to, indicating an estimated certainty or strong probability in the present, past, or future (cf. Aristonic. cited in [Refs 8th c.BC+]present infinitive (or its…
μέλλω
mello
a strengthened form of 3199 (through the idea of expectation); to
intend, i.e. be about to be, do, or suffer something (of persons or
things, especially events; in the sense of purpose, duty, necessity,
probability, possibility, or hesitation):--about, after that, be
(almost), (that which is, things, + which was for) to come, intend,
was to (be), mean, mind, be at the point, (be) ready, + return, shall
(begin), (which, that) should (after, afterwards, hereafter) tarry,
which was for, will, would, be yet.
see GREEK for 3199
μέλλω
v.
I am about to
μέλλω mellō 109x
to be about to, be on the point of, Mt. 2:13; Jn. 4:47; it serves to express in general a settled futurity, Mt. 11:14; Lk. 9:31; Jn. 11:51; to intend, Lk. 10:1; participle μέλλων, μέλλουσα, μέλλον, future as distinguished from past and present, Mt. 12:32; Lk. 13:9; to be always, as it were, about to do, to delay, linger, Acts 22:16
μέλλω to think of doing, intend to do, to be about to do, with inf., mostly inf. fut., τάχ᾽ ἔμελλε δώσειν he was just going to give, Il.; μέλλεις ἀφαιρήσεσθαι ἄεθλον thou thinkest to strip me of the prize, id. Il.; often with οὐκ ἄρα, as, οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ἔμελλες λήξειν; did you not think you might stop? could you not stop? Od., etc.; to be about to do (on compulsion), to be destined to do or to be, τὰ οὐ τελέεσθαι ἔμελλον which were not to be accomplished, Il.; μέλλεν οἶκος ἀφνειὸς ἔμμεναι the house was destined to be wealthy, Od.; εἰ ἐμέλλομεν ἀνοίσειν if we were able to refer, Plat.
to express a certainty, μέλλω ἀπέχθεσθαι Διί it must be that I am hated by Zeus, Il.; μέλλω ἀθανάτους ἀλιτέσθαι I must have sinned against the immortals…
Read the full entry →Verb-PAI-2S — Verb · present · active · indicative · second person · singularpresent active indicative — an action in progress.
V-PAI-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: second Number: Singular
a-bout': The use of this word as a preposition, in the sense of "around," is confined to the Old Testament. In the New Testament, generally an adverb, for Greek hos or "hosei." The Revised Version (British and American) adopts it in several idiomatic translations of mello, referring to what is about to be, i.e. on the point of occurring, or immediately impending, amending the King James Version, in Ac 5:35; 27:2; Re 12:4, etc.
111 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 40 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 110 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ἔδει γὰρ τὸν κόσμον τελειότατον μὲν ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κατ’ ἀριθμὸν τέλειον παγῆναι τὸν ἕξ, ἐν ἑαυτῷ δ’ ἔχειν μέλλοντα τὰς ἐκ συνδυασμοῦ γενέσεις πρὸς μικτὸν ἀριθμὸν τὸν πρῶτον ἀρτιοπέριττον τυπωθῆναι, περιέξοντα καὶ τὴν τοῦ σπείροντος ἄρρενος καὶ…
μέλλει γὰρ περιέξειν ἅπασαν τὴν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχαιολογίαν καὶ διάταξιν τοῦ πολιτεύματος ἐκ τῶν Ἑβραϊκῶν μεθηρμηνευμένην γραμμάτων.
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
Νικαίαν ἀποδημῆσαι πρὸς σέ, ὅπως ἂν αὐτῶι δῶις ἐπιστολὴν πρὸς Ἑρμάφιλον· λέγουσιν γὰρ αὐτὸν μέλλειν ἐγδημεῖν εἰς Μέμφιν. ἔρρωσο.
τὴν τῆς ἡμῶν μητρὸς τελευτὴν συνελθὼν ἑτέρᾳ γυναικί, τολμηθεὶς λυπρὸν χρόνον ἔμεινεν. τούτου δὲ μέλλοντος τὸν βίον μεταλλάσσειν μετεκαλεσάμεθα τὴν προειρημένην αὐτοῦ γυναῖκα καὶ ταύτης ἐπυθόμεθα μήπως τι χρεωστῇ
ον τῆς κώμης, ὁμοίως δὲ τὸν Ἰσίδωρον ἀναδέξασθαι καὶ ἀποπληρῶσαι ἀόκνως εἰς τὴν μέλλει ὁ Πτολεμαῖος αἱρεθῆναι ἢ προσαγγελῆναι λειτουργίαν. ὁπότερον δὲ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔξεστι ἀλλάξαι τὸν ἕτερον
πάσχω (paschō) means to suffer or be affected by something, often with a focus on negative experiences. It can also refer to positive experiences when qualified by an adjective. The New Testament frequently uses it in contexts of suffering, such as in Luke 22:15 and 1 Peter 2:19. The word is built from the root meaning to receive an impression, and it appears in various forms across Greek literature.
πάσχω,
[in LXX: Am 6:6 (חלה ni.), Wi 12:27, Si 38:16, al.;]
to suffer, be acted on, as opp. to acting, often limited by a word expressive of good or evil;
πάσχω; 2 aor. ἔπαθον : pf. πέπονθα (Lk. xiii. 2; Heb. ii. 18); fr. Hom. down; to be affected or have been affected, to feel, have a sensible experience, to undergo; it is a vox media— used in either a good or a bad sense; as, ὅσα πεπόνθασι καὶ ὅσα αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, of perils and deliverance from them, Esth. ix. 26 (for AN); hence κακῶς πάσχειν, to suffer sadly, be in bad plight, of a sick person, Mt. xvii. 15 where L Tr txt. WH txt. x. ἔχειν (on the other hand, εὖ πάσχειν, to be well off, in good case, often in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down). 1. in a bad sense, of misfortunes, to suffer, to undergo evils, to be afflicted, (so everywhere in Hom. and Hes.; also in the other Grk. writ. where it is used absol.): absol., Lk. xxii. 15; xxiv. 46; Acts i. 8; iii. 18; xvii. 3; 1 Co. xii. 26; Heb. ii. 18; ix. 26; 1 Pet. ii. 19 sq. 23; iii. 17; iv. 15,19; Heb. xiii. 12; ὀλίγον, a little while, 1 Pet. v.…
Read the full entry →πάσχω. For the neutral sense of this verb ‘fam acted upon,” “experience,” as in Mt 1715 (v. /.), cf. the common euphemism ἐάν te πάσχω with reference to death, e.g. P Eleph 23 (B.c. 285-4) ἐὰν δέ τι πάσχηι Διονύσιος, P Petr [. 149 (4 Will—s.c. 237) ἐὰν δέ τι] ἀνθρώπινον πάσχω καταλιμπάνω τὰ ὑπίάρχοντα KTA., and P Ryl Il. 68% (B.c. 89) where ἐὰν μέν τι πάθω is contrasted with ἐὰν δὲ In a deed of divorce. P Flor Ζ (εν rive. περιγένωμαι, “11 survive.
πάσχω (paschō) — to suffer.
πάσχω,
[Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἔπασχον [Refs]: future πείσομαι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect 3rd.pers. singular παισεῖται [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: aorist ἔπᾰθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: perfect πέπονθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐπεπόνθειν[Refs]; Attic dialect ἐπεπόνθη [Refs 5th c.BC+] (all the above tenses in [Refs 8th c.BC+], present and aorist only in [Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect πέπασθε (so [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine perfect participle πεπᾰθυῖα [Refs]; Doric dialect perfect πέποσχα [Refs 7th c.BC+]:—have something done to one, suffer, opposed to do, ὅσσ᾽ ἔρξαν τ᾽ ἔπαθόν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δρᾶν καὶ πάσχειν, see at {δρά; πολλὰ μὲν.. πείσεσθαι}, πολλὰ δὲ ποιήσειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]passive of ποιέω compare [Refs 4th c.BC+] to be treated so and so by another, suffer it at his hands, ἃ πάσχοντες ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρων ὀργίζεσθε, ταῦτα τοὺς ἄλλους μὴ ποιεῖτε [Refs 5th…
Read the full entry →πάσχω,pavscw
"3958 pascho {pas'-kho} 包括 (patho {path'-o} 和 pentho {pen'-tho})
patho path'-o, and
pentho pen'-tho, used only in certain tenses for it
apparently a primary verb; to experience a sensation or impression
(usually painful):--feel, passion, suffer, vex.
πάσχω
v.
I am acted upon, suffer
πάσχω radical sense, to receive an impression from without, to suffer, as opp. to doing, ἔρξαν τ᾽ ἔπαθόν τε Od.; δρᾶν καὶ πάσχειν, etc.; ὁμοίως π. τινί to be in the same case with . . , Hdt.
the sense is often limited by some word expressing good or evil:
κακῶς πάσχειν to be ill off, in evil plight, unlucky, Od., etc.; κακῶς π. ὑπό τινος to be ill used, ill treated by . . , Aesch.; often with an adj., κακά, λυγρὰ π. Il., etc.; δεινὰ π. Dem.; also with a Subst., ἄλγεα π. etc., Hom.
εὖ πάσχειν to be well off, in good case, lucky, Theogn., etc.; also, to receive benefits, opp. to εὖ δρᾶν, Aesch., etc.; so, ἀγαθὰ π. Hdt., etc.
without a limiting word, it always refers to evil, being used for κακῶς or κακὰ π., μάλα πολλ᾽ ἔπαθον Od., etc.; μή τι πάθηις lest thou…
Verb-2AAN — Verb · second aorist · active · infinitivesecond aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5629
42 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 18 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 40 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
οὐ γὰρ ὡς πέφυκεν ὁ θεὸς εὖ ποιεῖν, οὕτως καὶ τὸ γινόμενον εὖ πάσχειν, ἐπεὶ τοῦ μὲν αἱ δυνάμεις ὑπερβάλλουσι, τὸ δ’ ἀσθενέστερον ὂν ἢ ὥστε δέξασθαι τὸ μέγεθος αὐτῶν ἀπεῖπεν ἄν, εἰ μὴ διεμετρήσατο σταθμησάμενος εὐαρμόστως ἑκάστῳ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον.
καὶ ὁ μὲν θεὸς ταῦτα προστάξας αὐτοῖς πάσχειν μετοικίζει τὸν Ἄδαμον καὶ τὴν Εὔαν ἐκ τοῦ κήπου εἰς ἕτερον χωρίον.
ἔτι δὲ καὶ τοῦτο, ἀδελφοί μου: εἰ ὁ κύριος ὑπέμεινεν παθεῖν περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἡμῶν, ὢν παντὸς τοῦ κόσμου κύριος ᾧ εἶπεν ὁ θεὸς ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου: Ποιήσωμεν ἄνθρωπον κατ̓ εἰκόνα καὶ καθ̓ ὁμοίωσιν ἡμετέραν: πῶς οὖν ὑπέμεινεν ὑπὸ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπων παθεῖν;
οὖν ἐστιν; ἐγὼ πεπεισμένος μου τῇ διανοίᾳ μηθὲν κακῷ ἢ πονηρῷ συνειδώς, δοκῶ μηδὲν παθεῖν· ὃ ἐὰν οὖν ἐφίδω πῶς μου τὰ πραγμάτια χωρεῖ πάλιν σοι δηλώσω, κύριε· οἶδα
r Αὐρηλίῳ Ἀντωνείνῳ ἑκατοντάρχῳ παρὰ Στοτοήτιος Ἀγχώφεως ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. βίαν πάσχων ἑκάστοτε ὑπὸ Ἑκύσεως ἐπικαλουμένου Εὐπορᾶ τινος ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης ὅστις πολλὰ μὲν καὶ
Αὐρηλίῳ Ἀντωνείνῳ ἑκατοντάρχῳ παρὰ Στοτοήτιος Ἀγχώφεως ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. βίαν πάσχω ἑκάστοτε ὑπὸ Ἐκύσεως ἐπικαλουμένου Εὐπορᾶ τινος ἀπὸ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης, ὅστις πολλὰ μὲν καὶ
ἰδού,
[in LXX chiefly for הִנֵּה,]
prop. imperat. 2 aor. mid. of ὁράω, used as a demonstrative particle, with frequency much greater in LXX and NT than in cl. (v. M, Pr., 11),
ἰδού, a demonstrative particle, [in Grk. writ. fr. Soph. down], found in the N. T. esp. in the Gospels of Matthew and of Luke, used very often in imitation of the Hebr. nan, and giving a peculiar vivacity to the style by bidding the reader or hearer to attend to what is said: behold! see! lo! It is inserted in the discourse after a gen. absol., Mt. i. 20; ii. 1, 13; ix. 18; xii. 46; xvii. 5; Xxvi.47; xxviii. 11. καὶ ἰδού is used, when at the close of a narrative something new is introduced, Mt. ii. 9; ili. 16; iv. 11; viii. 2, 24, 29,32, 34; ix. 2 54. 20; xii. 10; KV 224 ΧΥΙ- Ss) KIX. 10... eva. 91; ΧΧΥΪ. 51: ΧΧΥΤΙ ὦ, 7; Lk. i. 20, 31, 36; ii. 9[R GL Tr br. ], 25; ix. 30, 38 sq.; x. 25; xiv. 2; xxiv.13; Acts xii.7; xvi.1; when a thing is specified which is unexpected yet sure, 2 Co. vi. 9 (καὶ ἰδοὺ ζῶμεν, and nevertheless we live), cf. Mt. vii. 4; when a thing is specified which seems…
Read the full entry →ἰδού. Moulton (Pro/eg. p. 11) has shown that the frequency with which ἰδού (originally the imper. of εἰδόμην and accented ἰδοῦ) is used by certain NT writers is due to the fact that they were accustomed to the constant use of an equivalent interjection in their own tongue: cf. Wellhausen £ini.* p. 22. As showing, however, that the interjection was used in the Kou where no Hebraistic influence is predicable, we may cite P Oxy VII. 10665 (iii/A.p.) εἰδ[ο]ὺ οὖν ἀπέστιλά σοι αὐτήν, with reference to the return of a file, 76. 10691 (very illiterate—iii/a.p.) εἰδοὺ γὰρ kal τὸ πορφύρειν μετὰ τῶν συ[ν]έργων κεῖντε, “see, the purple is put with the tools” (cf. 1.5), 74. X. 12917 (A.D. 30) οὐδ[εί]ς μοι ἤνεγκεν ἐπιστολήν περὶ ἄρτων, ἀλλ᾽ εὐθέως, ἡ (-- εἰ) ἔπεμψας διὰ ἸΚολλούθου ἐπιστολήν, εἰδοὺ ἀρτάβηι σοι γίνεται, ‘“‘no one has brought me a letter about the bread, but if you send a letter by…
Read the full entry →ἰδού (idou) — look!.
ἰδοῦ
(ἴδου Hdn.Gr. cited in [Refs 4th c.AD+]aorist 2 imperative middle of ὁρά; but,
II. ἰδού (on the accent see Hdn.Gr.[Refs] adverb, lo! behold! (even with words of hearing, ἰδοὺ δοῦπον αὖ κλύω τινά [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.1. with Nouns and Prons., ἰ. χελιδών Klein [Refs 6th c.BC+], etc.; ἰ. ἐγώ here am I, [LXX+NT]; οὐκ ἰ. Ἀαρώ; [LXX]
II.2. with Verbs,
II.2. a in the imperative, ἰ. θεᾶσθε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially in offering a thing, take it! ἰ. δέχου παῖ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. b in indicative of all tenses, ἰ. πείθομαι [NT+5th c.BC+] with past tenses, [LXX+NT]; in the middle of a sentence, [NT]
II.3. with questions, ἰ., τί ἔστι; [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἰδού
idou
second person singular imperative middle voice of 1492; used as
imperative lo!; --behold, lo, see.
see GREEK for 1492
ἰδού
v.
See! Lo! Behold! Look!
ἰδού 2nd sg mid imperat of εἰδόμην, as adv. lo! behold! see there! Soph.; ἰδού, δέχου there! take it! Lat. en tibi! id. Soph., etc.:— well, as you please! Ar.
in repeating another's words quizzingly, ἰδού γ᾽ ἄκρατον oh yes, wine, id. Ar.
Verb-2AMM-2S — Verb · second aorist · middle · imperative · second person · singularsecond aorist middle imperative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AMM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
208 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Counted over the 603 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
δή is a Greek particle that adds emphasis or precision to the words it accompanies, often translating to terms like 'indeed' or 'certainly.' It is used with verbs, pronouns, and in various constructions to enhance meaning, such as in Matthew 13:23. The entries indicate it can express urgency in commands or affirmations, but they do not present significant disagreement on its usage.
δή
consecutive co-ordinating particle with no exact equiv. in Eng., giving greater exactness and emphasis to the word or words to which it is attached; sometimes translatable as now therefore, then, verily, certainly.
With verbs: imperat., Ac 6:3 (WH, mg.) 13:2, I Co 6:20; hort. subjc., Lk 2:15, Ac 15:36; indic., δή που (T, δήπου, q.v.), He 2:16.
With pronouns: ὃ δή, now this is he who, Mt 13:23.†
δή, (shortened fr. ἤδη [al. al.]), a particle which, the Epic phrases δὴ τότε, δὴ yap excepted, is never placed at the beginning of a sentence, but is joined to some preceding word, and indicates that “what it introduces can be taken as something settled, laid down in deed and in truth” (Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 392): now therefore, then, verily, in truth, (Lat. jam, igitur, sane, ete.—although neither Lat., Germ., [nor Eng.] has a word precisely equiv. to 67). 1. added to relative pronouns: ὃς δή who is such a one as, who preéminently, who then, Mt. xiii. 23. 2. joined to imperatives and hortatory subjunctives it signifies that the thing enjoined must be done forthwith, at once [cf. W. § 43, 3 a.], so that it may be evident that it is being done (cf. Passow i. p. 612”), where the Lat. says agedum, jam, Germ. doch, nur, [ Eng. now, only, but]: Lk. ii. 15; Acts [vi. 3 LL WH mre. br.]…
Read the full entry →δή (dē) — so.
δή,
properly a temporal Particle (compare ἤδη), at this or that point: hence, now, then, already, or at length:
I. in Epic dialect (rarely Lyric poetry) sometimes at the beginning of a sentence or clause, Τεῦκρε πέπον, δὴ νῶϊν ἀπέκτατο πιστὸς ἑταῖρος [Refs 8th c.BC+], frequently with Numerals and temporal Particles, ὀκτὼ δὴ προέηκα.. ὀϊστούς [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐννέα δὴ βεβάασι.. ἐνιαυτοί full nine years, [Refs]; ἕκτον δὲ δὴ τόδ᾽ ἦμαρ this is just the sixth day, [Refs 8th c.BC+] many a time and oft, often ere now,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάλαι δή, Latin jamdudum, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; νῦν δή just now, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; now at length, [Refs]; τότε δή at that very time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αὐτίκα δὴ μάλα this very instant, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὕστερον δή yet later, [Refs 5th…
δή
de
probably akin to 1161; a particle of emphasis or explicitness; now,
then, etc.:--also, and, doubtless, now, therefore.
see GREEK for 1161
δή
Disj.prt.
so, then, indeed, truly
δή dē 5x
a particle that adds an intensity of expression to a term or clause. Its simplest and most ordinary uses are when it gives impressiveness to an affirmation, indeed, really, doubtless, Mt. 13:23; or earnestness to a call, injunction, or entreaty, Lk. 2:15; Acts 13:2; 15:36; 1 Cor. 16:20*
δή Particle used to give greater exactness, to the word or words which it influences (prob. a shortened form of ἤδη, Lat. jam) now, in truth, indeed, surely, really.
Usage of δή with single words:
after Adjectives, οἶος δή, μόνος δή, all alone, Od., etc.; esp. such as imply magnitude, μέγας δή, μικρὸς δή, etc.; often with Superlatives, μέγιστος δή, κράτιστος δή quite the greatest, confessedly the best, Thuc.; so with Numerals, ὀκτώ δὴ προέηκα ὀϊστούς I have shot full eight arrows, Il.; εἷς δή one only, Eur., etc.
after Adverbs, πολλάκις δή many times and oft, often ere now, Lat. jam saepe, Il.; ὀψὲ δὲ δή quite late, id. Il.; νῦν δή even now, now first, now at length, Xen., etc.:— τότε δή at that very time, Thuc.; αὐτίκα δὴ μάλα on the very spot, Plat.; also, ναὶ δή yea verily, Il.; οὐ δή surely not…
Particle — Particleparticle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle
7 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 81 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
μέλλω is a verb meaning to be about to do something, indicating intention or future action. It can express necessity, probability, or mere intention, often followed by an infinitive. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts suggesting both planned actions and events that are destined to occur, such as in Matthew 2:13 and Acts 12:6. The participle form ὁ μέλλων refers to future things.
μέλλω,
[in LXX: Jb 3:8 (עָתִיד) 19:25 (אַחֲרוֹן); elsewhere for fut., and freq. in Wi, II, IV Mac;]
to be about to be or do;
c. inf. (Bl., § 62, 4; 68, 2; M, Pr., 114);
μέλλω ; fut. μελλήσω (Mt. xxiv. 6; and LTTrWH in 2 Pet. i. 12); impf. ἔμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. ix. 31 (exc. T WH); Jn. vi. 6, 71 (exc. RG) ; vii. 39 (exe. T); xi. 51 (exc. L Tr); Acts xxi. 27; Rev. iii. 2 (where R pres.); x. 4 (exe. L Tr)] and ἤμελλον [so all edd. in Lk. vil. 2; x. 1 (exe. RG); xix. 4; Jn. iv. 47; xii. 33; xviii. 32; Acts xii. 6 (exc. RGL); xvi. 27 (exe. RG); xxvii 33 (exe. RGT); Heb. xi. 8 (exe. L); ef. reff. s. v. βούλομαι, init. and Rutherford’s note on Babrius 7, 15], to be about to do anything; so 1. the ptep., ὁ μέλλων, absol.: τὰ μέλλοντα and τὰ ἐνεστῶτα are contrasted, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; εἰς τὸ μέλλον, for the future, hereafter, Lk. xiii. 9 [but see eis, A. II. 2 (where Grimm supplies éros)]; 1 Tim. vi. 19; τὰ μέλλοντα, things future, things to come, i. e., ace. to the context, the more perfect state of things which will exist in the αἰὼν μέλλων…
Read the full entry →μέλλω. In the NT μέλλω is construed 84 times with the pres. cf. P Par 432 (B.C. 154) μέλλω δὲ ἰσάγειν ἐν τῷ μεσορὴ μηνί, 75. 4819. (B.c. 153) καταπλεῖν μέλλομεν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα, P Meyer 209 (1st half iii/A.D.) μέλλι πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἔρχεσθαι, pe σοι ἀεὶ γράφειν, Ὁ ae 11. 416° (iii/ A.D.) μέλλω péve εἰς ᾿Αντινόου, and P Oxy VIII. 11567° (iii/A.p.) μέλλο[με]ν χόρτου χρίαν ἔχιν. For the constr. with the fut. inf., which is obsolete in the NT (cf. TR Ac 233°), cf. Syi/ 432! (B.c. 326-5) ὀμόσασιν. . . [ποιήσεσθαι τὴν] ἐπιτροπὴν καθ᾽ ὅτι ἂν μέλλει ἔσ[εϊσθαι κτλ. Μέλλω followed by the aor. inf. act. is seen in such passages as P Giss I. 125 (ii/A.p.) ὁσάκις ἐὰν μέλλῃς πέμψαι, P Oxy XII. 14$82° (ii/a.p.) ἔμελλον yap ἀνελθεῖν, and 26. VII. 106727 (iii/A.D.) εἰ μέλλεις ἐλθεῖν ἐλθέ, ‘come if you are coming,” and by the aor. inf. pass. in P Goodsp Cairo 310 (iii/B.c.) ἡνίκα fiehioy κοιμηθῆναι ἔγραψα…
Read the full entry →μέλλω (mellō) — to ensue.
μέλλω,
imperfect ἔμελλον and ἤμελλον (see. below), Epic dialect μέλλον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect, Ionic dialect μέλλεσκον [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: future μελλήσω [NT+4th c.BC+]: aorist ἐμέλλησα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive and middle, see below see.—Only present and imperfect in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Lyric poetry, and Trag.: aorist only in Prose (except [Refs 6th c.BC+]imperfect ἤμελλον with long augment is established by the metre in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist 1 ἠμέλλησα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἤμελλον is not found in earlier Attic dialect Inscrr., but occurs in Papyrus, as [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I. to be destined or likely to, indicating an estimated certainty or strong probability in the present, past, or future (cf. Aristonic. cited in [Refs 8th c.BC+]present infinitive (or its…
μέλλω
mello
a strengthened form of 3199 (through the idea of expectation); to
intend, i.e. be about to be, do, or suffer something (of persons or
things, especially events; in the sense of purpose, duty, necessity,
probability, possibility, or hesitation):--about, after that, be
(almost), (that which is, things, + which was for) to come, intend,
was to (be), mean, mind, be at the point, (be) ready, + return, shall
(begin), (which, that) should (after, afterwards, hereafter) tarry,
which was for, will, would, be yet.
see GREEK for 3199
μέλλω
v.
I am about to
μέλλω mellō 109x
to be about to, be on the point of, Mt. 2:13; Jn. 4:47; it serves to express in general a settled futurity, Mt. 11:14; Lk. 9:31; Jn. 11:51; to intend, Lk. 10:1; participle μέλλων, μέλλουσα, μέλλον, future as distinguished from past and present, Mt. 12:32; Lk. 13:9; to be always, as it were, about to do, to delay, linger, Acts 22:16
μέλλω to think of doing, intend to do, to be about to do, with inf., mostly inf. fut., τάχ᾽ ἔμελλε δώσειν he was just going to give, Il.; μέλλεις ἀφαιρήσεσθαι ἄεθλον thou thinkest to strip me of the prize, id. Il.; often with οὐκ ἄρα, as, οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ἔμελλες λήξειν; did you not think you might stop? could you not stop? Od., etc.; to be about to do (on compulsion), to be destined to do or to be, τὰ οὐ τελέεσθαι ἔμελλον which were not to be accomplished, Il.; μέλλεν οἶκος ἀφνειὸς ἔμμεναι the house was destined to be wealthy, Od.; εἰ ἐμέλλομεν ἀνοίσειν if we were able to refer, Plat.
to express a certainty, μέλλω ἀπέχθεσθαι Διί it must be that I am hated by Zeus, Il.; μέλλω ἀθανάτους ἀλιτέσθαι I must have sinned against the immortals…
Read the full entry →Verb-PAI-3S — Verb · present · active · indicative · third person · singularpresent active indicative — an action in progress.
V-PAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
a-bout': The use of this word as a preposition, in the sense of "around," is confined to the Old Testament. In the New Testament, generally an adverb, for Greek hos or "hosei." The Revised Version (British and American) adopts it in several idiomatic translations of mello, referring to what is about to be, i.e. on the point of occurring, or immediately impending, amending the King James Version, in Ac 5:35; 27:2; Re 12:4, etc.
111 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 40 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 110 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ἔδει γὰρ τὸν κόσμον τελειότατον μὲν ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κατ’ ἀριθμὸν τέλειον παγῆναι τὸν ἕξ, ἐν ἑαυτῷ δ’ ἔχειν μέλλοντα τὰς ἐκ συνδυασμοῦ γενέσεις πρὸς μικτὸν ἀριθμὸν τὸν πρῶτον ἀρτιοπέριττον τυπωθῆναι, περιέξοντα καὶ τὴν τοῦ σπείροντος ἄρρενος καὶ…
μέλλει γὰρ περιέξειν ἅπασαν τὴν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχαιολογίαν καὶ διάταξιν τοῦ πολιτεύματος ἐκ τῶν Ἑβραϊκῶν μεθηρμηνευμένην γραμμάτων.
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
Νικαίαν ἀποδημῆσαι πρὸς σέ, ὅπως ἂν αὐτῶι δῶις ἐπιστολὴν πρὸς Ἑρμάφιλον· λέγουσιν γὰρ αὐτὸν μέλλειν ἐγδημεῖν εἰς Μέμφιν. ἔρρωσο.
τὴν τῆς ἡμῶν μητρὸς τελευτὴν συνελθὼν ἑτέρᾳ γυναικί, τολμηθεὶς λυπρὸν χρόνον ἔμεινεν. τούτου δὲ μέλλοντος τὸν βίον μεταλλάσσειν μετεκαλεσάμεθα τὴν προειρημένην αὐτοῦ γυναῖκα καὶ ταύτης ἐπυθόμεθα μήπως τι χρεωστῇ
ον τῆς κώμης, ὁμοίως δὲ τὸν Ἰσίδωρον ἀναδέξασθαι καὶ ἀποπληρῶσαι ἀόκνως εἰς τὴν μέλλει ὁ Πτολεμαῖος αἱρεθῆναι ἢ προσαγγελῆναι λειτουργίαν. ὁπότερον δὲ αὐτῶν οὐκ ἔξεστι ἀλλάξαι τὸν ἕτερον
The Greek word βάλλω (i.e., *ballō*) means to throw, cast, or place something, and can apply to both physical and metaphorical contexts. It is used in various ways, such as throwing weapons, pouring liquids, or even casting someone into a situation. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like casting out demons or laying down burdens. The lexicons do not indicate significant disagreement about its meanings.
βάλλω,
[in LXX for נפל, שׂום, ידד, etc.;]
prop., of a weapon or missile; then generally, of things and persons, lit. and metaph., to throw, cast, put, place: c. acc., seq. εἰς, Mt 4:18, and freq. ἐπί, Mt 10:34; κάτω, Mt 4:6; ἔξω, Mt 5:13; ἀπό, Mt 5:29; ἐκ, Mk 12:44; δρέπανον, Re 14:19; μάχαιραν, Mt 10:34; κλῆρον, Mt 27:35; of fluids, to pour: Read the full entry →
βάλλω; fut. Bara; pf. βέβληκα ; 2 aor. ἔβαλον (3 pers. plur. ἔβαλον in Lk. xxiii. 34; Acts xvi. 23, ἔβαλαν, {π6 Alex. form, in Acts xvi. 37 L T Tr WH; [Rev. xviii. 19 Lehm., see WH. App. p. 165 and] for reff. ἀπέρχομαι init.) ; Pass., [pres. βάλλομαι] ; pf. βέβλημαι ; plpf. ἐβεβλήμην; 1 aor. ἐβλήθην; 1 fut. βληθήσομαι ; to throw, — either with force, or without force yet with a purpose, or even carelessly ; 1. with force and effort: βάλλειν τινὰ ῥαπίσμασι to smite one with slaps, to buffet, ΜΚ. xiv. 65 Rec. (an imitation of the phrases, τινὰ βάλAew λίθοις, βέλεσι, τόξοις, etc., κακοῖς, ψόγῳ, σκώμμασι. etc., in Grk. writ. ; cf. Passow i. p. 487; [L. and S.s. v. T. 1 and 3]; for the Rec. ἔβαλλον we must read with Fritzsche and Schott ἔβαλον, fr. which arose ἔλαβον, adopted by L T Tr WIL; βαλεῖν and λαβεῖν are often confounded in codd. ; οἵ. Grimm on 2 Mace. y. 6; [Serivener, Introd. p.…
Read the full entry →βάλλω. That the verb does not necessarily imply casting or thrusting with some degree of violence is clear already from the NT itself; and there are vernacular parallels to negative the assumption of “Jewish Greek.” Thus in BGU 11. 5974 (A.D. 75) ἵνα βάληι τὸν μόσχον mpd τῶν προβάτων the verb does not suggest a violent ‘‘ Βιησίηρ ἡ of the helpless calf before the ferocious beasts afterwards named. Cf. P Oxy VII. 1069%° (iii/A.pD.) κ[α]λὰ μέτρα αὐτῷ βαλέτωσαν, ‘let them put good measure into it” with reference to the making of a tunic, and 2d. VI. 9349 (iii/A.D.) μὴ οὖν ἀμελήσῃς τοῦ βαλεῖν τὴν κόπρον, “do not fail therefore to throw the manure on the land” (Edd.): ef. P Fay 1187! (a.p. 110) βάλλωι ἕξ ἀρούρας εἰς τὴν Ψεννόφριν, “1 am manuring six arourae at Psennophris” (Edd.). For a similar absolute usage see Sy// 5227 (iii/p.c.) θύειν δὲ τὸμ μὲν βοῦν BeBAnκότα, τὴν δὲ οἷν βεβληκ[υ]ῖαν…
Read the full entry →βάλλω (ballō) — to throw: throw.
βάλλω,
future βᾰλῶ (in Attic dialect Prose only in compounds), Ionic dialect βαλέω [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἔβᾰλον, Ionic dialect προ-βάλεσκε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; later aorist 1 ἔβαλα [LXX]; Epic dialect and Ionic dialect infinitive βαλέειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative βλείης in [Refs 5th c.BC+], participle βλείς [Refs]perfect βέβληκα: pluperfect ἐβεβλήκειν, Epic dialect βεβλήκειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, Ionic dialect imperfect βαλλέσκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]future βᾰλοῦμαι (προ-) [Refs 8th c.BC+]aorist 2 ἐβᾰλόμην, Ionic dialect imperative βαλεῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+] used mostly in compounds:—passive, future βληθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle δια-βεβλησόμενος [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: aorist ἐβλήθην [Refs 8th c.BC+] also has an Epic dialect aorist passive, ἔβλητο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; subjunctive βλήεται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; optative βλῇο or βλεῖο [Refs 8th…
Read the full entry →βάλλω
ballo
a primary verb; to throw (in various applications, more or less
violent or intense):--arise, cast (out), X dung, lay, lie, pour, put
(up), send, strike, throw (down), thrust. Compare 4496.
see GREEK for 4496
βάλλω
v.
I cast, throw, rush, put, place, drop
ἀμφιβάλλω amphiballō 1x
to throw around; to cast a net, Mk. 1:16*
βάλλω Root ΒΑΛ Act. to throw:
with acc. of person or thing aimed at, to throw so as to hit, to hit one with a missile, opp. to striking (τύπτω, οὐτάω), βλήμενος ἠὲ τυπείς Il.; c. dupl. acc. pers. et partis, μιν βάλε μηρὸν ὀϊστῶι id. Il.: c. acc. cogn. added, ἕλκος, τό μιν βάλε the wound which he gave him, id. Il.:—also, βάλε κατ᾽ ἀσπίδα smote upon it, id. Il.
of things, ἡνίοχον ῥαθάμιγγες ἔβαλλον id. Il.; of the Sun, ἀκτῖσιν ἔβαλλεν [χθόνα] Od.: to strike the senses, of sound, κτύπος οὔατα βάλλει Il.
metaph., β. τινὰ κακοῖς to smite with reproaches, Soph., etc.; φθόνος βάλλει τινά Aesch.
Verb-2AAN — Verb · second aorist · active · infinitivesecond aorist active infinitive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5629
In general "to throw," with various degrees of violence; usually, with force, but not so necessarily, as e.g. in "cast a net," "cast lots." When applied to molten metal, as in English, first, "to let run. into molds," with reference to their descent by gravity, and, then, "to form," as in Ex 25:12, etc. Usually in the New Testament for ballo, but not always. Thus, in Lu 1:29 "cast in her mind" means "considered" (dielogizeto); "cast reproach" for Greek oneidizon, "reproached" (Mt 27:44); "casting down" for kathaireo, "demolishing" (2Co 10:4); "casting all anxiety upon" (1Pe 5:7), a still stronger term, as in
123 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 61 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 123 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 27 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
21,20) ἢ βαλλόμενον καὶ τοξευόμενον ἀποκύουσι.
εὐμενῶς τε οὖν αὐτὸν προσδέχεσθαι τὴν θυσίαν παρεκάλει καὶ μηδεμίαν ὀργὴν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ὁμοίαν βαλεῖν, ὅπως ἔργοις τε τοῖς ταύτης προσλιπαροῦντες καὶ πόλεις ἀναστήσαντες εὐδαιμόνως ζῆν ἔχοιεν καὶ μηδενὸς ὧν καὶ πρὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἀπέλαυον ὑστερῶσιν…
Περιέσχεν με συναγωγὴ πονηρευομένων, ἐκύκλωσάν με ὡσεὶ μέλισσαι κηρίον, καί: Ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβαλον κλῆρον.
ἐπεὶ κοπρηγεῖν μέλλει τὰ κτήνη εἰς Ψεννῶιφριν, ἔχοντας βελενκώθια καὶ σηστρίδια ὡσεὶ εἰς ξυλαμήν. βάλλω ἓξ ἀρούρας εἰς τὴν Ψεννῶφριν. ἐὰν ἀναβαίνῃ τὰ κτήνη γέμισον αὐτὰ βάκανον καὶ ξύλον.
κιβαριάτου τ … τοῦ ὄξους οὔπω πέπρακα … κριθῆς. ἔλαβον ἄλλας δύο ἀρτάβας καὶ ἔβαλον αὐτὰς ἐπάνω τῶν ἄλλων ἀρταβῶν ϛ. ἔχω παρα … ὡς ἐνετείλω μοι. ἄσπασαι Σαραπάμμωνα
ἐστομώσαμεν σίδηρα εἰς στόμωμα καὶ εἰς τοὺς σφῆνας. ὡς βάλλουσι τοὺς σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
διάβολος is derived from διαβάλλω, meaning slanderous or accusing falsely. It refers to a slanderer or the Devil, particularly in the New Testament, where it is used to denote Satan as the accuser of humanity. Key verses include Matthew 4:1 and 1 Timothy 3:11. The lexicons consistently identify it with the concept of false accusation and malevolence.
διάβολος, -ov, (διαβάλλω, q. ν.); prone to slander, slanderous, accusing falsely, (Arstph., Andoc., Plut., al.): 1 Tim. iii. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. ii. 3; as subst. ὁ διάβολος, a calumniator, false accuser, slanderer, [see κατηγορέω. fin.], (Xen. Ages. 11, 5; [Aristot., al.]): Sept. Esth. vii. 4; viii. 1. In the Bible and in eccl. writ. ὁ διάβολος [also διάβ. without the art.; cf. W. 124 (118); B. 89 (78)] is applied κατ᾽ ἐξοχήν to the one called in Hebr. jOwn, ὁ σατανᾶς (q. v.), viz. Satan, the prince of demons, the author of evil, persecuting good men (Jobi.; Zech. iii. 1 sqq., cf. Rev. xii. 10), estranging mankind from God and enticing them to sin, and afflicting them with diseases by means of demons who take possession of their bodies at his bidding; the malignant enemy of God and the Messiah: Mt. iv. 1, 5, [8, 11]; xiii. 39; xxv. 41; Lk. iv. 2, [3, 5 RL, 6, 13]; viii. 12; Jn.…
Read the full entry →διάβολος (diabolos) — devilish/the Devil.
διάβολ-ος, ον,
slanderous, backbiting, γραῦς [Refs 4th c.BC+]: superlative -ώτατος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; διάβολόν τι, aliquid invidiae, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. substantive, slanderer, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enemy, [LXX]: hence, = Sâtân,[Refs]; the Devil, [NT]
III. adverb -λως injuriously, invidiously, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
διάβολος
diabolos
from 1225; a traducer; specially, Satan (compare 7854):--false
accuser, devil, slanderer.
see GREEK for 1225
see HEBREW for 07854
διάβολος, ον
Adj
slanderous, the Slanderer, the Devil
διάβολος diabolos 37x
slanderer, 1 Tim. 3:11; 2 Tim. 3:3; Tit. 2:3; a treacherous informer, traitor, Jn. 6:70; ὁ διάβολος, the devil
διάβολος διάβολος, ον slanderous, backbiting, Sup.; διαβολώτατος Ar.
as Subst. a slanderer, Arist.: the slanderer, the Devil, NTest.
adv. -λως, injuriously, invidiously, Thuc.
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
dev'-'-l. See DEMON; SATAN.
Devil
(Gr. diabolos), a slanderer, the arch-enemy of man’s spiritual interest (Job 1:6; Rev. 2:10; Zech. 3:1). He is called also “the accuser of the brethen” (Rev. 12:10).
In Lev. 17:7 the word “devil” is the translation of the Hebrew sair, meaning a “goat” or “satyr” (Isa. 13:21; 34:14), alluding to the wood-daemons, the objects of idolatrous worship among the heathen.
In Deut. 32:17 and Ps. 106:37 it is the translation of Hebrew shed, meaning…
(slanderer). The name describes Satan as slandering God to man and man to God. The former work is of course, a part of his great work of temptation to evil and is not only exemplified but illustrated as to its general nature and tendency by the narrative of Gen. 3. The other work, the slandering or accusing men before God, is the imputation of selfish motives, (Job 1:9,10) and its refutation is placed in the self-sacrifice of those "who loved not their own lives unto death." [SATAN; DEMON]
A fallen angel; and particularly the chief of them, the devil, or Satan. He is the great principle of evil in the world; and it is his grand object to counteract the good that God desires to do. He exerts himself, especially with his angels, to draw away the souls of men from embracing salvation through Jesus Christ.
His name signifies the calumniator, or false accuser; as the Hebrew Satan means the adversary. But the Scriptures give him various other appellations descriptive of his character. He is called, "The prince of this world," Joh 12:31; "The prince of the power of the air," Eph 2:2; "The god of this world," 2Co 4:4; "The dragon, that old serpent, the devil," Re 20:2…
38 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 37 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 15 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸς πανθαμαρτωλὸς ὢν καὶ μήπω φυγὼν τὸν πειρασμόν, ἀλλ̓ ἔτι ὢν ἐν μέσοις τοῖς ὀργάνοις τοῦ διαβόλου σπουδάζω τὴν δικαιοσύνην διώκειν, ὅπως ἰσχύσω κἂν ἐγγὺς αὐτῆς γενέσθαι, φοβούμενος τὴν κρίσιν τὴν μέλλουσαν.
τοῖς οὖν κληθεῖσι πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν ἔθηκεν ὁ κύριος μετάνοιαν: καρδιογνώστης γὰρ ὢν ὁ κύριος καὶ πάντα προγινώσκων ἔγνω τὴν ἀσθένειαν τῶν ἀνθρώπων καὶ τὴν πολυπλοκίαν τοῦ διαβόλου, ὅτι ποιήσει τι κακὸν τοῖς δούλοις τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ πονηρεύσεται εἰς…
ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν εὑρεθῶμεν τῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ: μιμηταὶ δὲ τοῦ κυρίου σπουδάζωμεν εἶναι, τίς πλέον ἀδικηθῇ, τίς ἀποστερηθῇ, τίς ἀθετηθῇ: ἵνα μὴ τοῦ διαβόλου βοτάνη τις εὑρεθῇ ἐν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ̓ ἐν πάσῃ ἁγνείᾳ καὶ σωφροσύνῃ μένητε ἐν Ἰησοῦ Χριστῷ σαρκικῶς καὶ…
οἶδα μὲν ἀεὶ ὅτι διὰ τῶν ἁγίων σου εὐχῶν σωθήσομαι ἀπὸ παντὸς πειρατηρίου τοῦ διαβόλου καὶ ἀπὸ πάσης ἐπιβουλίας ἀνθρώπων, καὶ νῦν παρακαλῶ ὅπως μνημονεύσῃς μου ἐν ταῖς ἁγίαις
θην μάλα εὐχαριστήσας τῷ πανελεήμονι θεῷ ἐ … εργι πάντοτε τὸν διάβολον. τὴν εὐλογίαν, ἣν ἀπέστειλεν ἡ σὴ ἁγιότης διὰ τῶν σῶν παίδων, τὰ τῆς πανηγυρήσεως,
πρεσβείας τῶν ὁσίων ὑμῶν εὐχῶν ὅπως ῥυσθῶ παρὰ τοῦ Κρείττονος … πατ … τοῦ διαβόλου … ε μεῖζον πάντων προσκυνῶ καὶ ἀσπάζομαι ἐκθύμως τὴν ὑμετέραν πατρικὴν διάθεσιν μετὰ τῶν
The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.
ἐκ (ἐξ),
prep. c. gen.,
from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,
prep. c. gen.,
of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.
Of Place,
ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…
Read the full entry →ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…
Read the full entry →ἐκ (ek) — out from.
ἐκ,
before a vowel ἐξ, also
__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.
__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:
__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]
ἐκ
ek
or ex ex
a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or
motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or
figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,
betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),
for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X
heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,
off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,
through,
X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,
with the same general import; often of completion.
ἐκ, ἐξ
Prep.
from out, out from among, from
ἐκ ek 915x
ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →
ἐκ
ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:
out of, from. c. gen.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.
to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.
to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.
of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.
with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
ov:
(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.
OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]
1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.
I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.
For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.
It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.
Lamentations 3:1.
The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.
Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.
That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.
Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…
933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.
σύ,
pron. of 2nd pers.,
thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also
Read the full entry →σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…
Read the full entry →σύ (su) — you.
σύ [ῠ],
thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →σύ
su
the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See
also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.
see GREEK for 4675
see GREEK for 4571
see GREEK for 4671
see GREEK for 5209
see GREEK for 5210
see GREEK for 5213
see GREEK for 5216
σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ
Pers.pr.
you
σύ sy 2x
you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6
Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · pluralgenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural
3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.
παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν
η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ
παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .
εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'
εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…
Read the full entry →εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…
Read the full entry →εἰς (eis) — toward.
ἐν εἰς
or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:
Read the full entry →εἰς
eis
a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or
entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);
also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,
(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more
exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,
+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the
intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at
one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the
end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often
used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs
(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).
εἰς
Prep.
into, in, among, till, for
εἰς
into, to c. acc.
PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:
OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.
with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·
ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς
καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν
ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς
φυλακή (phulakē) refers to a guarding or watch, often associated with the act of keeping watch or the place where individuals are held, such as a prison. It encompasses meanings related to security, custody, and the time divisions of night. The New Testament uses it in contexts of imprisonment (e.g., Mt 14:10) and as a watch during the night (e.g., Lk 12:38).
φυλακή, -ῆς, ἡ
(< φυλάσσω)
[in LXX chiefly for מִשְׁמֶרֶת and cogn. forms, also for כֶּלֶא etc. ;]
actively, a guarding, guard, watch (Hom., Plat., Xen., al.): cogn. acc., φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, to keep watch, Lk 2:8;
of those who keep watch (as also Lat. custodia), a guard; pl., sentinels, a guard (Hom., al.): Ac 12:10;
φυλακή, -js, ἡ, (φυλάσσω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for NNW, Ww, 71D (a prison), x52 (enclosure, confinement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense, a watching, keeping watch: φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, to keep watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6, 10, etc.; Plat. lege. 6 p. 758 ἃ. down; [οἵ. φυλακὰς ἔχειν, ete. fr. Hom. (Il. 9, 1 ete.) on]; often also in Sept. for Το Ww). b. like the Lat. custodia and more freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Harpers’ Lat. Dict.] s.v.), iq. persons keeping watch, a guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. ward] (and very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10; xxy. 36, [39], 43 sq.; Mk. vi. 17, 27 (28); Lk. iii. 20; xxi. 12; xxii.33; Actsv.19, 22; vili.3; xii. ὅ 5α. 17; xvi. 27,40; xxii.4; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in ΗΘ}. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment]; 2 Co.…
Read the full entry →φυλακή. (1) For φυλακή in the general sense of ‘‘ care,” “charge,” of a thing: P Lille I. 78 (iii/B.c.) ἐπιζητήσαντος αὐτοῦ βυβλάριά τινα, ἃ ἐδεδώκειν ἐν φυ(λακῆι) ““1] me réclama de petits livres qu’il m’avait donnés en garde.” (2) ‘‘ watch,” “‘guard”’: P Tebt II. 2827 (late ii/B.c.) a guard declares that he will keep the best watch possible upon other people’s holdings—ov(Aakiv) ἀλ[λο]τρ[{1ὧν κλή(ρων) συντηιρήσιν ἀπὸ τίο]ῦ BeAti
φυλακή (phulakē) — prison/watch: prison.
φῠλᾰκ-ή, ἡ,
(φύλαξ) watching or guarding, especially by night, φυλακῆς μνήσασθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φυλακὰς ἔχειν keep watch and ward, [Refs]; φ. κατέχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλακὴ ἔχει αὐτόν watching engages him, variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+] tell an unarmed man to stand on the defensive, i.e. to give commands that cannot be obeyed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅπως ἀφανὴς εἴη ἡ φ. that there might be nothing visible to watch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλακὰς φυλάξειν keep watch and ward, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλακὰς καταστήσασθαι, κατασκευάσασθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. watch or guard, of persons, [NT+5th c.BC+]; φ. τοῦ σώματος a body guard, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; garrison of a place or fortress, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ…
φυλακή
phulake
from 5442; a guarding or (concretely, guard), the act, the person;
figuratively, the place, the condition, or (specially), the time (as a
division of day or night), literally or figuratively:--cage, hold,
(im-)prison(-ment), ward, watch.
see GREEK for 5442
φυλακή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
a watching, guard, prison, imprisonment
φυλακή phylakē 47x
a keeping watch, ward, guard, Lk. 2:8; a place of watch, Rev. 18:2; a watch, guard, body of guards, Acts 12:10; ward, custody, imprisonment, 2 Cor. 6:5; 11:23; Heb. 11:36; prison, 1 Pet. 3:19; a place of custody, prison, Mt. 14:10; 25:39, 44; a watch or division, of the night, which in the time of our Savior was divided into watches of three hours each, called ὀψέ, μεσονύκτιον, ἀλεκτοροψωνία and πρωία, or πρωί, Mt. 14:25; 24:43;
φυλακή φυ^λα^κή, ἡ, φυλάσσω a watching or guarding, watch, guard, ward, esp. by night, φυλακῆς μνήσασθε keep watch and ward, Il.; so, φυλακὰς ἔχειν id. Il.; ὅπως ἀφανὴς εἴη ἡ φ. that there might be nothing visible to watch, Thuc.; φυλακὴν φυλάττειν to keep watch, Xen.; τὰς φ. ποιεῖσθαι id. Xen.; φυλακὰς καταστήσασθαι to set watches, Ar.
a watch or guard, of persons, Plat., Xen., etc.; ἡ τοῦ σώματος φ. a body guard, Dem.:— a guard or garrison, Hdt.; ἡ ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ φ., of a squadron of ships, Thuc.
of place, a watch, station, post, Il., Xen.
of time, a watch of the night, Hdt., Eur., etc.
a place for keeping others in, a ward, prison, Anth., NTest.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
Prison
The first occasion on which we read of a prison is in the history of Joseph in Egypt. Then Potiphar, “Joseph’s master, took him, and put him into the prison, a place where the king’s prisoners were bound” (Gen. 39:20-23). The Heb. word here used (sohar) means properly a round tower or fortress. It seems to have been a part of Potiphar’s house, a place in which state prisoners were kept.
The Mosaic law made no provision for imprisonment as a punishment. In the wilderness two persons were “put in ward” (Lev. 24:12; Num. 15:34), but it was only till the mind of God concerning them should be ascertained. Prisons and prisoners are mentioned in the book of Psalms (69:33; 79:11; 142:7). Samson was confined in a…
[For imprisonment as a punishment, see PUNISHMENTS] It is plain that in Egypt special places were used as prisons, and that they were under the custody of a military officer. (Genesis 40:3; 42:17) During the wandering in the desert we read on two occasions of confinement "in ward" -- (Leviticus 24:12; Numbers 15:34) but as imprisonment was not directed by the law, so we hear of none till the time of the kings, when the prison appears as an appendage to the palace, or a special part of it. (1 Kings 22:27) Private houses were sometimes used as places of confinement. By the Romans the tower of Antoni, was used as a prison at Jerusalem, (
48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 71 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἡ μὲν οὖν εὐθιξία θέσις ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ, ἡ δὲ ἐπιμονὴ πρᾶξις τῶν καλῶν [τὸ ἐργάζεσθαι τὰ καλά], ἡ δὲ μνήμη φυλακὴ καὶ διατήρησις τῶν ἁγίων δογμάτων.
Οἱ μὲν οὖν ἱππεῖς παραλαβόντες τὸν Βενιαμὶν ἦγον πρὸς Ἰώσηπον καὶ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἑπομένων, ὁ δὲ τὸν μὲν ἰδὼν ἐν φυλακῇ, τοὺς δʼ ἐν πενθίμοις σχήμασι, τί δή, φησίν, ὦ κάκιστοι, φρονήσαντες ἢ περὶ τῆς ἐμῆς φιλανθρωπίας ἢ περὶ τοῦ θεοῦ τῆς προνοίας…
λέγει οὖν ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ κύριος, ὁ θεός σου, ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ κρατήσω τῆς χειρός σου καὶ ἐνισχύσω σε, καὶ ἔδωκά σε εἰς διαθήκην γένους, εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλῶν καὶ ἐξαγαγεῖν ἐκ δεσμῶν πεπεδημένους καὶ ἐξ οἴκου φυλακῆς…
τῆς τούτων ἀπαιτήσεως οὐ μετρίως ἐσκυλμένος ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ, ἀπὸ τοῦ τόπου συνόδου … μετὰ φυλακῆς τόπον ἐκ τόπου μεταγειοχότων καὶ ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου πρα … ησων ἀπʼ ὀλίγων
τας φάσκοντες τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν μεθεστακέναι πρὸς … λο … κατὰ φυλακὴν. καταστάντες δὲ καὶ ἀπολογησάμενοι ἐφάνημεν τῶι Κόρδωι ἀθῶιοι τῆς συκοφαντίας, ὥστε εἰ μὴ ἐξ
ἄλλος μητρὸς τῆς αὐτῆς συντάξιμον τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους Θεαδελφίας δραχμὰς ὀκτώ, γίνονται δραχμαὶ η, φυλακῆς δραχμὴν μίαν διώβολον, ἐπιμερισμοῦ ἀπόρων τρεισκαιδεκάτου ἔτους δραχμὰς δύο ἡμιώβολον δεσμοφυλάκων ἡμιώβολον χαλκοῦς β,
The Greek word ἵνα is primarily a conjunction meaning 'in order that' or 'that,' indicating purpose or intention. It can also function as an adverb of place, meaning 'where' or 'whither.' In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often introducing clauses that express purpose, such as in Matthew 1:22. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings or usages.
ἵνα, I. an adv. of Place. fr. Hom. down, esp. in the poets; a. where; in what place. b. to what place; whither. Of the former signification C. F. A. Fritzsche (on Mt. p. 836; differently in Fritzschiorum Opusce. p. 186 sqq-.) thought he had found two examples in bibl. Greek, and H. A. W. Meyer agrees with him. The first viz. iva μὴ φυσιοῦσθε, 1 Co. iv. 6, they explain thus: where (i. e. in which state of things viz. when ye have leatned from my example to think humbly of yourselves) the one is not exalted to the other’s disadvantage; the second, iva αὐτοὺς ζηλοῦτε, Gal. iv. 17, thus: where ye zealously court them; but see II. 1 d. below. “ iva I. a final Conjunction (for from local direction, indicated by the adverb, the transition was easy te mental direction or intention) denoting pur pose and end: to the intent that; to the end that, in order that; ἵνα pn, that not, lest; it is used…
Read the full entry →ἵνα (hina) — in order that/to.
ἵνα,
adverb,
I. of Place,
I.1. in that place, there, once in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. elsewhere relative, in which place, where,[Refs 8th c.BC+]: rarely in Attic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵ. ἡ Νίκη (i.e. ἐστίν) [Refs 8th c.BC+] [same place]; ἵν᾽ ἄν with subjunctive, wherever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as indirect interrogative, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. b after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔμαθε ἵ. ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἵν᾽ ἕσταμεν χρείας[Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. c with Verbs of motion, whither, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. of circumstance, γάμος.., ἵ. χρή at which, when, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἵ. μὲν ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς.., ἐνταῦθα.. when it was in their power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. ={ἐάν}, uncertain in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
ἵνα
hina
probably from the same as the former part of 1438 (through the
demonstrative idea; compare 3588); in order that (denoting the purpose
or the result):--albeit, because, to the intent (that), lest, so as,
(so) that, (for) to. Compare 3363.
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 3588
see GREEK for 3363
ἵνα
Cj.
in order that, so that
ἵνα Adverb,
of Place,
demonstr. in that place, there, only in Il. 10. 127.
relat., = ὅπου, in which place, where, Hdt., etc.;—so, ἵνα τε Il.; ἵνα περ Hom.:—c. gen., ἵνα γῆς in whatever part of the land, Hdt.; ἔμαθε ἵνα ἦν κακοῦ in what a calamity, id. Hdt.; οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κακοῦ Soph.
= ὅποι, with Verbs of motion, whither, Od.; ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ ἥκεις Soph.
of circumstance, when, at which, Od.
Final Conjunction, = ὅπως, that, in order that, Lat. ut, Hom.:
with subj.,
after principal tenses of ind., id. Hom., etc.
after historical tenses, in similes, where the aor. refers to any possible time, Od.
after opt. and ἄν, ἔδωκε μένος, ἵνα γένοιτο she gave him vigour, that he might become, Il.
with opt., after historical tenses, Hom., etc.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
so (co', although the Hebrew might be pointed cewe'; Assyrian Sib'u; Septuagint Segor, Soa; Manetho, Seuechos; Latin Sevechus; Herodotus (ii. 137 ff), Sabakon): In all probability the "Sabaeo" of Herodotus, the Shabaka, who founded the Ethiopian dynasty, the XXVth of Egyptian kings. His date is given as 715-707 BC (Flinders Petrie, History of Egypt, III, 281 ff), but we may suppose that before his accession to the throne he was entitled to be designated king, as being actually regent. To this So, Hoshea, king of Israel, made an appeal for assistance to enable him to throw off the yoke of the Assyrian Shalmaneser IV (2Ki 17:3). But Hoshea's submission to So brought him no advantage, for Shalmaneser came up throughout all the land and laid siege to Samaria. Not long after the fall of Samaria, So ventured upon an eastern campaign, and…
So
(Nubian, Sabako), an Ethiopian king who brought Egypt under his sway. He was bribed by Hoshea to help him against the Assyrian monarch Shalmaneser (2 Kings 17:4). This was a return to the policy that had been successful in the reign of Jeroboam I.
"So, king of Egypt," is once mentioned in the Bible -- (2 Kings 17:4) So has been identified by different writers with the first and second kings of the Ethiopian twenty-fifth dynasty, called by Manetho, Sabakon (Shebek) and Sebichos (Shebetek).
King of Egypt, made an alliance with Hoshea king of Israel, and promised him assistance; but was unable to prevent Shalmaneser king of Assyria from taking Samaria and subverting the kingdom, B. C. 721, 2Ki 17:4. See PHARAOH.
So is believed to have been the Servetus or Sabaco II of secular history, the second king of the Ethiopian or twenty-fifth dynasty, and the predecessor of Trihakah. A singular fact has been brought to light by the recent explorations at Nineveh, corroborating the Scripture record the more forcibly, because unexpected and direct. The Bible shows that Egypt and Assyria, though remote, were often in conflict during the height of the Assyrian ruins power, and that So was at war with Shalmaneser. After war comes the treaty of peace; and as the Bible prepares us to suppose such treaties were made, the Assyrian ruins…
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 669 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 300 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…
ἵνα καὶ τῆς πλινθίνης ἀφανισθείσης ὑπὸ τῆς ἐπομβρίας ἡ λιθίνη μείνασα παράσχῃ μαθεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ ἐγγεγραμμένα δηλοῦσα καὶ πλινθίνην ὑπʼ αὐτῶν ἀνατεθῆναι.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
καὶ θεῶν μὴ ὀκνήσῃς διελθὼν εἰς ἐμπόριον καὶ ἀγοράσας, οὐθὲν γὰρ ἄλλο ἡμᾶς ἐπικωλύει, ἵνα μὴ ὑστερήσωμεν τῆς ἐργασίας. τὰς δὲ τιμὰς τούτων λαβὲ παρὰ Ἀπολλοφάνους. τὸ γύναιον ἐπίτοκον
vestiges … ἵνα μηθὲν ἐν τούτοις ἀγνοηθῆι … … Ἑρμίαι τῶν διαδόχων καὶ ἐπιμελητῆι, παρὰ Δρύτωνος τοῦ
ἕκαστος τῶν παρὰ σοὶ σιτοποιησάμενος πυροῦ ἀρτάβην μίαν ἐν ἑτοίμωι ἔσται αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄρτος, ἵνα δὲ καὶ κριθὴ ὑπάρξηι ἐπιμε … … ηγησαιἐμμέτρως αἴτησαιἐμμε … … τησαι ἔρρωσο ἔτους
πειράζω (peirazō) means to test or attempt, often with the implication of proving something's quality or character. It can refer to both positive trials, such as those permitted by God, and negative temptations, such as attempts to lead someone into sin. The New Testament uses it in contexts like testing faith (1 Cor. 10:13) and the temptations of Jesus (Mt. 4:1). The term is closely related to δοκιμάζω (dokímazō), but they are not synonymous.
THESE words occur not seldom together, as at 2 Cor. xiii. 5; Ps. xciv. 10 (at Heb. iii. 9 the better reading is ἐν δοκιμασίᾳ) ; but notwithstanding that they are both in our English Version rendered ‘ prove’ (Luke xiv. 19; John vi. 6), both ‘try’ (1 Cor. iii. 18; Rev. ii. 2), both ‘examine’ (1 Cor. xi. 28 ; 2 Cor. xiii. 5), they are not perfectly synonymous. In δοκιpatew, which has four other renderings in our Version,— namely, ‘discern’ (Luke xii. 56); ‘like’ (Rom. i. 28); ‘approve’ (Rom. ii. 18); ‘allow’ (Rom. xiv. 22),—lies ever the notion of proving a thing whether it be worthy to be received or not, being, as it is, nearly connected with δέχεσθαι. In classical Greek it is the technical word for putting money to the δοκιμή or proof, by aid of the δοκίμιον or test (Plato, Timeus, 65 c; Plutarch, Def. Orac. 21) ; that which endures this proof being δόκιμος, that which fails ἀδόκιμος…
Read the full entry →πειράζω, poët. and late prose form of πειράω, q.v.,
[in LXX for נסה pi.;]
to make proof of (Hom.).
to try, attempt (Luc., Polyb., al.): c. inf. (v. M, Pr., 205; Bl., § 69, 4), Ac 9:26 16:7 24:6.
In LXX and NT, like Heb. נסה, c. acc. pers., to test, try, prove;
in a good sense: Jo 6:6, II Co 13:5, He 11:17, Re 2:2; esp. of trials and afflictions sent or permitted by God (Ge 22:1, Ex 20:20, Wi 3:5, al.), I Co 10:13, He 2:18 4:15 11:17, 37,
πειράζω (a form found several times in Hom. and Apoll. Rhod. and later prose, for πειράω [which see in Veitch | more com. in the other Grk. writ.) ; impf. ἐπείραζον ; 1 aor. ἐπείρασα; Pass., pres. reypagopar; 1 aor. ἐπειράσθην; pf. ptep. πεπειρασμένος (Heb. iv. 15; see metpaw, 1); 1 qor. mid. 2 pers. sing. ἐπειράσω (Rev. ii. 2 Rec.); Sept. for 7D); ἰ0 try, i. 6. 1. to try whether a thing can be done; to attempt, endeavor: with an inf., Acts ix. 26 LT TrWH; xvi. 7; xxiv. 6. 2. to try, make trial of, test: τινά, for the purpose of ascertaining his quality, or what he thinks, or how he will behave himself ; a. in a good sense: Mt. xxii. 35 [al. refer this to b.]; Jn. vi. 6; [2Co. xiii. 5]; Rev. ii. 2. b. ina bad sense: to test one maliciously, craftily to put to the proof his feelings or judgment, Mt. xvi. 1; xix. 3; xxii. 18,35; Mk. Vii. 11; x. 2; xii. 15; Lk. xi. 16; xx. 28 (where GT WH…
Read the full entry →πειράζω. This poetic and late prose form of πειράω (g.v.), even when used in the general sense of ‘‘try,’’ ‘‘ test,” has always the idea of probation associated with it: see the instances cited by Hort ad Jas 1%, especially Plut. Wora/ia 15, p. 230a where “ἡ Namertes being congratulated on the multitude or his friends asked the spokesman εἰ δοκίμιον ἔχει τίνι τρόπῳ πειράζεται ὁ πολύφιλος ; and when a desire was expressed to know he said ᾿Ατυχίᾳ.᾽ For a more sinister sense cf. Vett. Val. p. 17° καθόλου δὲ κακεντρεχῶν τῇ διανοίᾳ, μάλιστα κατὰ τῶν πειραζόντων ἢ τῶν πονηρὰ δρώντων. The Biblical usage is fully discussed by Hort 7c. See also Kennedy Sowrces, p. 106 f., and the exx. from late Greek in Anz Subsidia, p. 274. MGr πειράζω (Thumb Ae//en. p…
Read the full entry →πειράζω (peirazō) — to test/tempt: tempt.
πειράζω,
(πεῖρα) used by early authors only in present and imperfect, the other tenses being supplied by πειράω, -άομαι: Cretan dialect future πειράξω [Refs]: aorist 1 imperative πείρᾰσον [Refs 1st c.AD+]: aorist passive ἐπειράσθην [LXX+NT]: perfect participle πεπειρασμένος [NT]:—make proof or trial of, with genitive, [Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. with infinitive, attempt to do, [NT+2nd c.BC+]; π. τι attempt a thing, ἄλλος ἄλλην ἐπ᾽ ἐμὲ πειράζει τέχνην [Refs 2nd c.AD+]make trial of, [Refs]: absolutely, make an attempt, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]
3. passive, ἤθη.. ἐν χρόνῳ πειράζεται are tried, proved, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; to be experienced, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
πειράζω
peirazo
from 3984; to test (objectively), i.e. endeavor, scrutinize, entice,
discipline:--assay, examine, go about, prove, tempt(-er), try.
see GREEK for 3984
πειράζω
v.
I try, tempt, test
πειράζω peirazō 38x
to make proof or trial of, put to the proof, whether with good or mischievous intent, Mt. 16:1; 22:35; absol. to attempt, Acts 16:7; 24:6; in NT to tempt, Mt. 4:1; to try, subject to trial, 1 Cor. 10:13
πειράζω πειράζω, to make proof or trial of, τινός Od.:—c. inf. to attempt to do, NTest.:—Pass., πεπειράσθω let trial be made, Ar.
like πειράω c. acc. pers. to try or tempt a person, put him to the test, NTest.: absol., ὁ πειράζων the tempter, id. NTest.:—Pass. to be sorely tempted, to be tempted to sin, id. NTest.
Verb-APS-2P — Verb · aorist · passive · subjunctive · second person · pluralaorist passive subjunctive — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-APS-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Subjunctive Person: second Number: Plural
41 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 24 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 39 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 19 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ζημία γὰρ ἐπὶ τοῖς πλείστοις τῶν παραβαινόντων ὁ θάνατος, ἂν μοιχεύσῃ τις, ἂν βιάσηται κόρην, ἂν ἄρρενι τολμήσῃ πεῖραν προσφέρειν, ἂν ὑπομείνῃ παθεῖν ὁ πειρασθείς.
Δεῖ σε, φησί, θλιβῆναι: οὕτω γάρ, φησί, προσέταξεν ὁ ἔνδοξος ἄγγελος τὰ περὶ σοῦ: θέλει γάρ σε πειρασθῆναι.
γὰρ πεῖρα ἐπάγεταί με προτρέψασθαι ὑμᾶς εἰρηνεύειν καὶ μὴ διδόναι ἀφορμὰς ἑτέροις καθʼ ὑμῶν. πείρασαι οὖν καὶ διʼ ἐμὲ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, χαρισάμενός μοι ὃ μεταξὺ ἐπιγνώσῃ ἀγαθόν. τὰ ἔρια
καὶ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτῆς ἃ ἔχω ἐπʼ ὀνόματος αὐτῆς χρέα καὶ ὑπάρχοντα καὶ ἄλλα ἐπείρασεν ἀποστερέσαι· αἰτουμένης δὲ τῆς Πτολέμας περιλυθῆναι αὐτῆς τὸν γάμον ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἀπενέγκασθαι τὰ ἐμὰ
γεουχούσης ἐν κώμῃ Τεπτῦνι. πρῴην οἱ τῆς κώμης πρεσβύτεροι ἐπῆλθάν μοι καὶ βιαίως χρώμενοι ἐπείρασαν ἀπαιτεῖν σιτικὰ δημόσια ὡς ὀφειλόμενα ὑπὸ ἀγνώστου μοι ἀνθρώπου, καταφρονοῦντές μου ὡς γυναικὸς ἀβοηθήτου
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἔχω, transliterated as echō, means 'to have' or 'to hold' and is used in various contexts, including possession, ability, and condition. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often relating to physical possession or metaphorical concepts like keeping faith or emotions. Notably, it can also refer to being pregnant, as seen in Matthew 1:18. The entries do not show significant disagreement.
ἔχω,
[in LXX for אָצֵל (ἐχόμενος), בַּעַל, יֵשׁ, etc., 59 words in all;]
(on the Aktionsart of the various tenses, v. M, Pr., 110, 145, 150, 183),
to have, as in cl., in various senses and constructions.
Trans.;
to have, hold, hold fast, etc.;
to hold, as, in the hand: Re 5:8 14:6, al.; ἐν τ. χειρί, Re 1:16 10:2, al.;
ἔχω ; fut. ἕξω ; impf. εἶχον, [1 pers. plur. εἴχαμεν, 2 Jn. ἔχω 266 5 T Tr WH], 8 pers. plur. εἶχαν (Mk. viii. 7 L T Tr WH; Rey. ix. 8 LT Tr WH; but ef. [ Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 38; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165]; B. 40 (35)) and εἴχοσαν (LT Tr WH in Jn. xv. 22, 24; but ef. Bitm. in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. 1858, pp. 485 sqq. 491; see his N. T. Gr. p. 43 (37); [Soph. Lex., Intr. p. 39; Τὰ Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 165; ef. δολεόω ]) ; pres. mid. ptep. ἐχόμενος ; to have,—with 2 aor. act. ἔσχον; pf. ἔσχηκα; I. Transitively. have (hold) in the hand: τὶ ἐν τῇ χειρί, Rev. i. 16; vi. 5; x. 2; xvii. 4; and simply, Rev. v. 8; viii. 3, 6; xiv. 6, ete.; Heb. viii. 3. Ὁ. in the sense of wearing (Lat. gestare) ; of garments, arms and the like: τὸ ἔνδυμα, Mt. iii. 4; xxii. 12; κατὰ κεφαλῆς ἔχων, sc. τί, having a covering hanging down from the head, i.e. having the head covered [B. $130, 5; W. §…
Read the full entry →ἔχω. It may be well to illustrate some of the less usual forms of this common verb. The future σχήσω (cf. Kithner-Blass Gr. 1. ii. p. 112 n.8) is restored by the editor in OGZS 751° (ii/ B.C.) ἐπεὶ θλιβέντες ἐμ πλείοσιν ἀσθενῶς [σχή]σετε. For the 2 aor. with 1 aor. termination (cf. Ac 757 D συνἐσχαν) see BGU 11. 4518 (i/ii A.D.) ἀναγκαίως ἔσχαμεν δ[ι7᾽ ἐπιστολῆς σε ἀσπάσεσθαι, and for ἔσχοσαν cf. OG/S 315°" (B.C. 164-159) ὑφοψίαν μοχθηράν, ἣν Kal περὶ Tod ἀδελφοῦ ἔσχοσαν. In 20. 2237 (iii/B.c.) we have αὐτοὶ ἀπολογισάμενοι περί τε τῆς εὐνοίας ἣν διὰ παντὸς εἰσχήκατε εἰς τὴν ἡμετέραν οἰκίαν, and for similar forms see the editor's note ® to 2b. 323. For the trans. use of the verb see such passages as P Oxy IV. 743!® (B.c. 2) εἰ καὶ m[p]ds ἄλλους εἶχον πρᾶγμα, βοηθὸν αὐτοῦ γ[εἸνέσθαι διὰ ἣν ἔχομε(ν) πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς φιλίαν, BGU I. 228(a.p. 114) (= «ϑελδείζογις, p. 74), which illustrate 1 Cor…
Read the full entry →ἔχω (echō) — to have/be.
ἔχω,
__A2nd pers. singular ἔχεισθα conjecture in [Refs 7th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive ἔχῃσθα [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect εἶχον, Epic dialect ἔχον [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect and poetry ἔχεσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἕξω, Epic dialect infinitive ἑξέμεναι [Refs 3rd c.BC+] (of momentary action, especially in sense check, see below [Refs 4th c.BC+], not found in Attic dialect Inscrr. or [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular σχήσησθα [Refs]aorist 1 ἔσχης α falsa lectio in [Refs 3rd c.AD+]aorist 2 ἔσχον, imperative σχές [Refs 5th c.BC+] only in Oracle texts cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; subjunctive σχῶ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural σχοίησαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive σχεῖν [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect σχέμεν [Refs] (in Alexandr. Gr. 3rd.pers. plural imperfect and aorist 2 εἴχοσαν [NT+3rd c.BC+], see at {Σχέθω}: perfect ἔσχηκα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic…
Read the full entry →ἔχω
echo
scheo skheh'-o; (used in certain tenses only)
a primary verb; to hold (used in very various applications, literally
or figuratively, direct or remote; such as possession; ability,
contiuity, relation, or condition):--be (able, X hold, possessed
with), accompany, + begin to amend, can(+ -not), X conceive, count,
diseased, do + eat, + enjoy, + fear, following, have, hold, keep, +
lack, + go to law, lie, + must needs, + of necessity, + need, next, +
recover, + reign, + rest, + return, X sick, take for, + tremble, +
uncircumcised, use.
ἔχω
v.
I have, hold, possess
ἔχω echō 708x
pluperfect., ἐσχήκειν, to hold, Rev. 1:16; to seize, possess a person, Mk. 16:8; to have, possess, Mt. 7:29, et al. freq.; to have, have ready, be furnished with, Mt. 5:23; Jn. 5:36; 6:68; to have as a matter of crimination, Mt. 5:23; Mk. 11:25; to have at command, Mt. 27:65; to have the power, be able, Mt. 18:25; Lk. 14:14;
Verb-FAI-2P — Verb · future · active · indicative · second person · pluralfuture active indicative — an action still to come.
V-FAI-2P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: second Number: Plural
716 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 97 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 709 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.
ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.
λογισάμενος οὖν τοῦτο, ὅτι ἐὰν μελήσῃ μοι περὶ ὑμῶν τοῦ μέρος τι μεταδοῦναι ἀφ̓ οὗ ἔλαβον, ὅτι ἔσται μοι τοιούτοις πνεύμασιν ὑπηρετήσαντι εἰς μισθόν, ἐσπούδασα κατὰ μικρὸν ὑμῖν πέμπειν, ἵνα μετὰ τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν τελείαν ἔχητε τὴν γνῶσιν.
ἔτους η Μεχεὶρ β, ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῆι κάτω
Μεχεὶρ β ἐν Παθύρει ἐπὶ Σώσου ἀγορανόμου. ὁμολογεῖ Ἁρκοννῆσις Φιγήριος Πέρσης τῶν μισθοφόρων ἱππέων ἔχειν παρὰ Ναομσήσιος τῆς Σπεμμίνιος εἰς λύτρα τετάρτης μερίδος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἐν τῇ κάτω
Ψεμμῖνις … ου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου χαίρειν. ὁμολογῶ ἔχειν παρὰ σοῦ χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα τρῖα ἄτοκα ?. ταῦτα δέ ἐστιν ἃ προσωφείλετό σοι
θλῖψις (thlipsis) is a feminine noun meaning pressure, often used metaphorically to denote tribulation, affliction, or distress. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to persecution and emotional turmoil. The word is derived from θλίβω and is associated with other terms like ἀνάγκη (necessity) and στενοχωρία (narrowness, distress). Notably, lexicons differ on the strength of these synonyms, with some suggesting στενοχωρία conveys a more intense sense of distress.
THESE words were often joined together. Thus στενοχωρία, occurring only four times in the N. T., is on three of these associated with θλῆψις (Rom. ii. 9; vill. 353 2 Cor. vi. 4; cf. Deut. xxviii. 55; Isai. vill. 22; xxx. 6). So too the verbs θλίβειν and στενοχωρεῖν (2 Cor. iv. 8; cf. Lucian, Nigrin. 13; Artemidorus, i. 79; ii. 37). From the antithesis at 2 Cor. iv. 8, θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι, and from the fact that, wherever in the N. T. the words occur together, στενοχωρία always occurs last, we may conclude that, whatever be the difference of meaning, στενοχωρία is the stronger word. They indeed express very nearly the same thing, but not under the same image. Θλῖψιες (joined with βάσανος at Ezek. xii. 18, with ἀνάγκη, Zeph. i. 15, and for which we have the form θλιμμός, Exod. iii. 9; Deut. xxvi. 7) is properly pressure, ‘pressura,’ ‘tribulatio,—which last διν. SYNONYMS OF…
Read the full entry →θλίψις (LTr., θλῖψις), -εως, ἡ
(< θλίβω),
[in LXX for צָרָה, etc.;]
pressure (Arist.). In LXX and NT metaph., tribulation, affliction, distress: Mt 24:9, 21, 29, Mk 13:19, 24, Jo 16:21, Ac 7:11 11:19, Ro 12:12, II Co 1:4, 8 4:17 6:4 7:4 8:2, 13, Phl 4:14, II Th 1:6, Ja 1:27, Re 1:9 2:9, 22 7:14; c. ἀνάγκη (q.v.), I Th 3:7; στενοχωρία (which from the order of the words would appear to be the stronger term), Ro 2:9 8:35; διωγμός,
θλίψις, or θλῖψις [so L Tr], (cf. W. § 6, 1 e.; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 35), -ews, ἡ, (θλίβω), prop. α pressing, pressing together, pressure (Strab. p. 52; Galen); in bibl. and eccles. Grk. metaph., oppression, affliction, tribulation, distress, straits; Vulg. tribulatio, also pressura (2 Co. i. 4°; Jn. xvi. [21], 33; [Phil. i. 16 (17); and in Col. i. 24 passio}) ; (Sept. for 7x, also for Ὃν, yoo, ete.): Mt. xxiv. 9; Acts vii. 11; xi. 19; Ro. xii. 12; 9'Co. i. 4, 8: iv. 11; vi. 4; vil. 4; vill. 2; 2 Th. 1 6; Rey. i. 9; ii. 9,22; vii. 14; joined with στενοχωρία [cef. Trench § lv.], Ro. ii. 9; viii. 35, (Deut. xxviii. 53 sq.; Is. [vili. 22]; xxx. 6); with ἀνάγκη, 1 Th. iii.7; with διωγμός, Mt. xiii. 21; Mk.iv.17; 2 Th.i.4; of the afflictions of those hard pressed by siege and the calamities of war, Mt. xxiv. 21, 29; Mk. xiii. 19, 24; of the straits of want, 2 Co. viii. 13; Phil.…
Read the full entry →θλῖψις. W.-Schm. Gy. p. 68) is generally thought to be confined to | Bibl. and eccles. Greek (cf. Milligan on 1 Th 18), but the | beginning of the later usage may be traced in OG/S 44415 (B.C. 125 or 77) διὰ τὰς τῶν πόλεων θλίψεις, apparently = ““because of the straits of the cities,” and perhaps in BGU IV. 1139 (B.c. 5) χάρν (7. χάριν) τῆς ἐσχηκνίας ἡμᾶς [[kowkn] By . . . ns θλεζίψ)εως, where, however, the meaning is not clear. See also the exx. which Boll (Offexsarung, p- 134 f.) quotes from Hellenistic astrology in illustration of Mt 2474, Mk 13¥, e.g. Catal. VIII. 3, 175, 5 évvovar
θλῖψις (thlipsis) — pressure.
θλῖψις, εως, ἡ,
pressure, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἀντέρεισις καὶ θ. [Refs 1st c.BC+]; of the pulse, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; ὑστερικαὶ θ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
2. crushing, castration, πώλων [Refs]
3. metaphorically, oppression, affliction, [LXX+1st c.BC+]
θλῖψις
thlipsis
from 2346; pressure (literally or figuratively):--afflicted(-tion),
anguish, burdened, persecution, tribulation, trouble.
see GREEK for 2346
θλῖψις, εως, ἡ
n.f.
persecution, affliction, distress
θλῖψις thlipsis 45x
pr. pressure, compression; met. affliction, distress of mind, 2 Cor. 2:4; distressing circumstances, trial, affliction, Mt. 25:9
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
trib-u-la'-shun (tsar, tsar, "staid," "narrow," "pent up"; compare Nu 22:26):
1. In the Old Testament:
Closely pressed, as of seals (Job 41:15 (7)); of streams pent up (Isa 59:9 margin); of strength limited (Pr 24:10, "small"). Hence, figuratively, of straitened circumstances; variously rendered "affliction," "tribulation," "distress" (De 4:30; Job 15:24; 30:12; Ps 4:2; 18:7; 32:7; 44:11, etc.; Ps 78:42; 102:3; 106:44; 119:143;
Tribulation
Trouble or affiction of any kind (Deut. 4:30; Matt. 13:21; 2 Cor. 7:4). In Rom. 2:9 “tribulation and anguish” are the penal sufferings that shall overtake the wicked. In Matt. 24:21, 29, the word denotes the calamities that were to attend the destruction of Jerusalem.
44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 45 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 57 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ἐξαπέστειλεν εἰς αὐτοὺς ὀργὴν θυμοῦ αὐτοῦ, θυμὸν καὶ ὀργὴν καὶ θλῖψιν, ἀποστολὴν δι’ ἀγγέλων πονηρῶν“ (Psalm.
κατὰ δὲ τὴν ὁδὸν ἀγγέλου θείου προσβαλόντος αὐτῷ κατά τι στενὸν χωρίον περιειλημμένον αἱμασιαῖς διπλαῖς ἡ ὄνος, ἐφʼ ἧς ὁ Βάλαμος ὠχεῖτο, συνεῖσα τοῦ θείου πνεύματος ὑπαντῶντος ἀπέκλινε τὸν Βάλαμον πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον τῶν τριγχῶν ἀναισθήτως ἔχουσα τῶν…
ὅτι διὰ τὴν παράβασιν αὐτῶν εἰς θλῖψιν θανάτου παραδοθήσονται.
εὐσήμως παρα … … … υπως πρὸς τοὺς κατὰ μέρος … … πᾶσαν ὑπογράφοντος θλῖψιν … … αὐτὸν προφανοῦς καὶ μοχθηρ … … μέχρι τῆς κα τοῦ Χοίαχ
ἐνεστῶτι … , διὰ δὲ τὴν τοῦ ποταμοῦ καταδεεστέραν ἀνάβασιν καὶ τὴν τοῦ καιροῦ θλῖψιν οὐ … δυνάμενος ἀπευλυτῆσαι … … αι … ενειν
Λύκου ἀμφοτέρων παρόντων ἀπὸ Λύκων πόλεως τῆς Θηβαίδος. πάρεσμεν χάριν τῆς ἐσχηκυίας ἡμᾶς βιωτικῆς θλίψεως ἐποιήσαμεν εἰς Πάρθον δοῦλον Χρήτου παραμονὴν ἔτι δὲ καὶ τροφῖτιν τοῦ γενομένου ἐξ ἀλλήλων
ἡμέρα is a feminine noun meaning 'day,' covering various usages from the natural day (sunrise to sunset) to a full 24-hour period. It appears in contexts contrasting day with night, as well as in metaphorical senses related to time and judgment. The New Testament references include specific phrases like 'by day' and 'every day,' with notable occurrences in Matthew and Revelation.
ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly (very freq.) for יוֹם;]
day;
ἡμέρα, -ας, ἡ, (fr. ἥμερος, -ον, prop. ἡμέρα ὥρα the mild time, cf. Lob. Paral. p. 359; [but cf. Curtius p. 594 sq.; Vanitek p. 9487); Hebr. ny; day; used 1. of the natural day, or the interval between sunrise and sunset, as distinguished fr. and contrasted with night; a. prop. ἡμέρας, by day, in the daytime, [ef. collog. Eng. of a day; W. § 30,11; B. § 132, 26], Rev. xxi. 25; ἡμέpas k. νυκτός, day and night [ef. W. 552 (513 sq.); Lob. Paralip. p. 62 sq.; Ellic. on 1 Tim. v. 5], Mk. v.5; Lk. xvili. 7; Actsix. 24; 1 ΤῊ. 11. 9; iii.10; [2 Th. iii.8 L txt. T Tr WH]; 1 Tim. v.5; 2 Tim.i.3; Rev. iv. 8; vii. 15; xii. 10; xiv. 11; xx.10; ἡμέρας μέσης, at midday, Acts xxvi. 13; νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν [ W. 230 (216); B.§ 131, 11], Mk. iv. 27; Acts xx. 31; 2 Th.iii.8 RG; hyperbolically i. q. without intermission, λατρεύειν, Lk. ii. 37; Acts xxvi. 7; ἡμέρας ὁδός, a day’s journey, Lk. ii. 44 (Gen. xxxi.…
Read the full entry →ἡμέρα. P Par 133} (8.6. 117) ἡμέρας, “during the day,” 7d. 275} (B.C. 160) τῆς ἡμέρας, ‘‘every day,” 23. 497° (B.c. 164-158) τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην ἀσχοληθείς, P Tebt I. 17° (B.c. 114) ἅμ᾽ ἡμέραι, ‘‘at daybreak,” P Giss I. 1710 (time of Hadrian) καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, P Oxy VII. 10296 (A.D. 107) els τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν, 74. τοῦ814 (iii/A.D.) ἡμερῶν ἀνοχὴν ἔχω, 26. X. 127513 (iii/A.D.) ἐφ᾽ ἡμέρας ἑορτῶν πέντε. In P Giss I. 197 (ii/A.D.) a wile writes to her husband—ovv]exas ἀγρυπνοῦσα γυκτὸς ἡϊμέρας μ]ήίαν μέριμναν ἔχω τὴν περὶ [τῆς σωτ]ηρίας σου. The noun is used of ¢ime generally, as in Jn 14°°, Ac 933 a/., in P Amh II. 304° (ii/B.c.) where a woman, who has been ordered to vacate a house, asks ‘‘ for time’”’—‘pépas αἰτοῦσα, promising that she will quit—ev ἡ[μ]έραις 4, “ within ten days.’ For the parenthetic nominative of time, as Mt 1532, Mk 85, Lk 928, we may perhaps cite P Lond 417} (c. A.D. 346)…
Read the full entry →ἡμέρα (hēmera) — day.
ἡμέρα,
Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἡμέρη [Refs], Doric dialect ἀμέρα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Locrian dialect ἀμάρα [Refs] (aspirated perhaps only in Attic dialect and West Ionic dialect, compare ἐπάμερος [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; usually unaspirated in early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs]; aspirated in codices even in dialects: original ἀμέρα probably took aspirate from ἑσπέρα): ἡ:—day, less frequently than ἦμαρ in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τίς νύ μοι ἡ. ἥδ; [Refs 8th c.BC+]; μῆνές τε καὶ ἡ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἡ σήμερον ἡ., see at {σήμερον· ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ} or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ at daybreak, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ. διέλαμψεν, ἐξέλαμψεν, ὑπέφαινε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ἡ. ὀψέ late in the day, [Refs]
Read the full entry →ἡμέρα
hemera
feminine (with 5610 implied) of a derivative of hemai (to sit; akin to
the base of 1476) meaning tame, i.e. gentle; day, i.e. (literally) the
time space between dawn and dark, or the whole 24 hours (but several
days were usually reckoned by the Jews as inclusive of the parts of
both extremes); figuratively, a period (always defined more or less
clearly by the context):--age, + alway, (mid-)day (by day, (-ly)), +
for ever, judgment, (day) time, while, years.
see GREEK for 5610
see GREEK for 1476
ἡμέρα, ας, ἡ
n.f.
a day
ἡμέρα hēmera 389x
day, a day, the interval from sunrise to sunset, opp. to νύξ, Mt. 4:2; 12:40; Lk. 2:44; the interval of twenty-four hours, comprehending day and night, Mt. 6:34; 15:32; from the Hebrew, ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ, day by day, every day, 2 Cor. 4:16; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας, from day to day, continually, 2 Pet. 2:8; καθ’ ἡμέραν, every day, daily, Acts 17:17; Heb. 3:13; a point or period of time, Lk. 19:42; Read the full entry →
ἡμέρα day, Hom., etc.:—phrases for day-break, ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ Xen.; ἡμ. διαλάμπει or ἐκλάμπει Ar.; ἡμ. ὑποφαίνεται Xen.; γίγνεται or ἐστὶ πρὸς ἡμέραν id. Xen.
with Adjs. to describe a state or time of life, ἐπίπονος ἡμ. a life of misery, Soph.; λυπρὰν ἄγειν ἡμ. Eur.; αἱ μακραὶ ἡμέραι length of days, Soph.; νέα ἡμ. youth, Eur.
poet. for time, ἡμ. κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια Soph.
absol. usages,
in gen., τριῶν ἡμερέων within three days, Hdt.; ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων within a few days, Thuc.: —also, ἡμέρας by day, Plat.; δὶς τῆς ἡμέρης ἑκάστης twice every day, Hdt.
Noun-GPF — Noun · genitive · plural · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
N-GPF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Feminine
392 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 389 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 1,082 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ἓξ δὲ ἡμέραις δημιουργηθῆναί φησι τὸν κόσμον, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ προσεδεῖτο χρόνων μήκους ὁ ποιῶν — ἅμα γὰρ πάντα δρᾶν εἰκὸς θεόν, οὐ προστάττοντα μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ διανοούμενον —, ἀλλ’ ἐπειδὴ τοῖς γινομένοις ἔδει τάξεως.
καὶ γενομένου τούτου κατανοήσας τὴν ὅλην ὕλην διεχώρισε τό τε φῶς καὶ τὸ σκότος καὶ τῷ μὲν ὄνομα ἔθετο νύκτα, τὸ δὲ ἡμέραν ἐκάλεσεν ἑσπέραν τε καὶ ὄρθρον τὴν ἀρχὴν τοῦ φωτὸς καὶ τὴν ἀνάπαυσιν προσαγορεύσας.
Ἡμερῶν οὖν οὐσῶν πονηρῶν καὶ αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἐνεργοῦντος ἔχοντος τὴν ἐξουσίαν, ὀφείλομεν ἑαυτοῖς προσέχοντες ἐκζητεῖν τὰ δικαιώματα κυρίου,
Πέρσαις τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως, χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα πέντε δραχμὰς δισχιλίας ἄτοκα εἰς ἡμέρας τριάκοντα ἀπὸ τοῦ Μεσορὴ τοῦ προκειμένου ἔτους. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι
μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ φαλάνθῳ ἀριστερῶι χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα δέκα δύο, γίνεται τάλαντα ιβ, ἄτοκα, ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀπὸ μηνὸς Παῦνι ιθ. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος Πανᾶς Ἀγαθίνωι
ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα τὰ τοῦ σιδήρου μνᾶς δισχιλίας χμ καὶ ἐπίτιμον ἡμέρας ἑκάστης ἧς ἐὰν μὴ ἀποδῶι τὸν σίδηρον χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς σ τῆς ἡμέρας ἑκάστης· ἡ
The Greek word δέκα (i.e., *deka*) means 'ten.' It is an indeclinable number used in various contexts, including references to time, such as 'ten days' in Revelation 2:10. The entries note its use in classical literature and its connections to other numbers, but there is no significant disagreement among lexicons regarding its meaning.
δέκα, οἱ, αἱ. τά, [fr. Hom. down], ten: Mt. xx. 24, ete. θλίψις ἡμερῶν δέκα, i.e. to last a short time: Rey. ii. 10; ef. Dan. i. 12, 14; Num. xi. 19; Ter. heaut. 5, 1, 36 decem dierum vix mi est familia. Sexa-Svo, rare in the earlier writ., frequent in the later (see Passow 8. v. δέκα [esp. Soph. Lex. 5. v.; ef. W. 23 (22); Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 18]), and in Sept.; i. q. δώδεκα, twelve: Acts xix. 7 and xxiv. 11, in both places LT Tr WH δώδεκα : [Rev. xxi. 16 Tdf. edd. 2, τ." [Sexa-<£, sixteen: Rev. xiii. 18 Lmrg. (Sept., al.) *] [δεκα-οκτώ for δέκα καὶ ὀκτώ, eighteen: Tdf. in Lk. xiii. 4, 11, but WH om. L Tr br. καί ; ef. s. v. καί, I. 1 b.*]
δέκα. The indeterminate use of δέκα to denote simply a period of time, which is found in Biblical Greek (Gen 2455, Numb , δεκαοκτω 1113, Dan 14, Rey 210), may be illustrated from P Petr IIT. 36 verso? where a prisoner complains that he has been harshly treated in prison—Awpa@t παραπολλύμενος μῆνές εἰσιν δέκα, *‘ p-rishing from hunger for the last ten months” ; and from a more literary source in the J/imes of Herodas I. 24 —Bék’ εἰσὶ μῆνες, during which a husband, who has gone on a journey to Egypt, does not write to his wife. See further Lumbroso in Archiv iv. p. 319 f., where some parallels are quoted from literary Kowy. Of course there is no proof that the above is not to be taken literally.
δέκα (deka) — ten.
δέκᾰ, οἱ, αἱ, τά,
indeclinable, ten, [Refs 8th c.BC+]the Ten, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also οἱ δ. the Attic dialect Orators, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; τὰ δέκα [ἔτη] ἀφ᾽ ἥβης those who are ten years past [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. ἄνδρες, = Latin decemviri, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] δεκᾰ-είς, [NT+4th c.BC+]; Thess. δεκαπέμπε [Refs 1st c.BC+]
δέκα
deka
a primary number; ten:--(eight-)een, ten.
δέκα
Indec.num.
ten
δέκα Some connect it with δάκτυλος, from the number of the fingers. ten, Lat. decem, Hom., etc.: —οἱ δέκα the Ten, Oratt.: οἱ δέκα [ἔτη] ἀφ᾽ ἥβης those who are ten years past 20 (the age of military service), Xen.
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominativenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)
27 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 149 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Ὁ μὲν οὖν Σόλων ἑβδομάσι δέκα ταῖς εἰρημέναις καταριθμεῖ τὸν ἀνθρώπινον βίον.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
λέγει δὲ οὕτως καὶ ὁ προφήτης: Βασιλεῖαι δέκα ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς βασιλεύσουσιν, καὶ ἐξαναστήσεται ὄπισθεν μικρὸς βασιλεύς, ὃς ταπεινώσει τρεῖς ὑφ̓ ἓν τῶν βασιλέων.
Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι
ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι πρόκεινται. ἐπρίαντο Ἑτπεσοῦχος Νεχθανούφιος καὶ οἱ τούτου ἀδελφοὶ πρὸς χαλκοῦ ταλάντων δέκα . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην πάντων Πετεαρσεμθεῦς ὁ ἀποδόμενος, ὃν
Λιβύης τοῦ Διοπολίτου ἐπὶ … τοῦ παρὰ … ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο Ὧρος Ἑρμίου ὡς ἐτῶν δέκα δύο μετὰ προσπωλουμένης τῆς Ὥρου συγγενοῦς Ἀρσινόης τῆς Βελλέους ὡς ἐτῶν κβ μέσης μελιχρόου
γίνομαι (ginomai) is a versatile Greek verb meaning to come into being, be born, or arise. It covers a wide range of uses, from the creation of things to events occurring. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as birth (e.g., Romans 1:3), occurrences in nature (e.g., John 12:29), and actions being performed (e.g., Matthew 21:42). It can also express the idea of becoming or changing states.
γίνομαι, Ion. and κοινή for Att. γίγν- (M. Pr., 47; Bl., §6, 8 Mayser, 166 f.),
[in LXX chiefly for היה ;]
of persons, things occurrences, to come into being, be born, arise, come on: Jo 1:15 8:58, I Co 15:37; a first appearance in public, Mk 1:4, Jo 1:6, al.; seq. ἐκ (of birth), Ro 1:3, Ga 4:4; διά, Jo 1:3; βροντή, Jo 12:29; σεισμός, Re 6:12; γογγυσμός, Ac 6:1; χαρά, Ac 8:8, many other similar exx.; ἡμέρα, Lk 22:66, al.; ὀψέ, Read the full entry →
γίνομαι (in Ionic prose writ.and in com. Grk. fr. Aristot. on for Attic γίγνομαι) ; [impf. ἐγινόμην ; fut. γενήσομαι ; 2 aor. ἐγενόμην (often in 3 pers. sing. optat. γένοιτο ; [ptep. yevapevos, Lk. xxiv. 22 Tdf. ed. 7]), and, with no diff. in signif., 1 aor. pass. ἐγενήθην, rejected by the Atticists (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 108 sq.; [Thom. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 75, 6 sq.]), not rare in later Grk., common in Sept. (Acts iv. 4; 1 Th. ii. 14; 1 Co. xv. 10, etc.), impv. γενηθήτω (Mt. vi. 10; xv. 28, ete.) ; pf. γεγένημαι and γέγονα, 3 pers. plur. γέγοναν L T Tr WH in Ro. xvi. 7 and Rey. xxi. 6 (cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 124; WH. App. p. 166; Soph. Lex. p. 37 sq.; Curtius, Das Verbum, ii. 187]; W. 36 and 76 (73) sq-; Mullach p. 16; B. 43 (37 sq.)), [ptep. γεγονώς] ; plpf. 3 pers. sing. ἐγεγόνει (Jn. vi. 17 [not Tdf.];. Acts iv. 22 [where L T Tr WH γεγόνει, cf. W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29); Tdf.’s note on…
Read the full entry →γίνομαι {Ξ ΠῚ. p. 210) γενοῦ πρὸς "Ata τὸν ποιμένα καὶ δέξαι παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ δραχμὰς διακοσίας, P Flor II. 180 (a.p. 253) ἐὰν γένηται πρός σε Διόσκορος, α΄. Γίνομαι sometimes supplies an aorist fir εἰμί : ἐγενόμην is normally ingressive (= became), but has to serve on occasion for summary (‘‘constative ’’) aorist as well—cf. Prolfeg. p. 109. Thus P. Flor III. 382% (cited ad 72.) might be translated ‘the son whom I neither have nor ever had,’’ as well as ‘‘ nor was ever born to me.” Lk 13? is an instance of this summary use. It appears in a very common technical usage, by which γενόμενος, with the tithe of an official, etc., denotes “ex-’’: where the title forms a verb, the aor, the perf.) partic. of this is used instead. arch” is γυμνασιαρχήσας. For the periphrasis cf. P Oxy I. 3811 (a.p. 49-50) (= Selections, p. 53) καθὰ π|ζα]ρῆλθον ἐπὶ τοῦ γενομένου τοῦ νομοῦ στρατηγοῦ Ilaciwyvos, “1…
Read the full entry →γίνομαι (ginomai) — to be.
γίγνομαι,
Ionic dialect and after [Refs 4th c.BC+] γίνομαι [ῑ], (Attic dialect Inscrr. have γιγν- in fifth and fourth cententury,[Refs]; Thess. γίνυμαι [Refs]; Boeotian dialect γίνιουμαι [Refs]future γενήσομαι: aorist ἐγενόμην (ἐγενάμην [LXX] (προ-) Decrees Byzantine cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+], Ionic dialect 2nd pers. singular γένευ [Refs 8th c.BC+], 3rd.pers. singular γενέσκετο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect γέντο [Refs 8th c.BC+] (gṇ-το): perfect γέγονα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: 3rd.pers. plural γέγοναν [NT]: pluperfect ἐγεγόνει [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect ἐγεγόνεε [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect forms (as if from perfect γέγᾰα), 2nd pers. plural γεγάᾱτε [Refs 8th c.BC+]pluperfect ἐκ-γεγάτην [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive γεγάμεν [ᾰ] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; participle γεγᾰώς -ᾰυῖα, plural -ᾰῶτες, -ᾰυῖαι [Refs 8th c.BC+], contraction γεγώς, -ῶσα [Refs…
Read the full entry →γίνομαι
ginomai
a prolongation and middle voice form of a primary verb; to cause to be
("gen"-erate), i.e. (reflexively) to become (come into being), used
with great latitude (literal, figurative, intensive, etc.):--arise, be
assembled, be(-come, -fall, -have self), be brought (to pass), (be)
come (to pass), continue, be divided, draw, be ended, fall, be
finished, follow, be found, be fulfilled, + God forbid, grow, happen,
have, be kept, be made, be married, be ordained to be, partake, pass,
be performed, be published, require, seem, be showed, X soon as it
was, sound, be taken, be turned, use, wax, will, would, be wrought.
γίνομαι
v.
I come into being, am born
γίνομαι ginomai 669x
pluperfect, ἐγενόει (3rd sg), to come into existence; to be created, exist by creation, Jn. 1:3, 10; Heb. 11:3; Jas. 3:9; to be born, produced, grow, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 8:58, et al.; to arise, come on, occur, as the phenomena of nature, etc.; Mt. 8:24, 26; 9:16, et al.; to come, approach, as morning or evening, Mt. 8:16; 14:15, 23; to be appointed, constituted, established, Mk. 2:27; Gal.…
Read the full entry →Verb-PNM-2S — Verb · present · no voice stated · imperative · second person · singularpresent no voice stated imperative — an action in progress.
V-PNM-2S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: iMperative Person: second Number: Singular
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 180 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 668 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
πρὸς δὲ τὸ μὴ γεγονὸς οἰκείωσις οὐδεμία τῷ μὴ πεποιηκότι.
ὡς ὁ κατακλυσμὸς ἐγένετο καὶ ὃν τρόπον Νῶχος σωθεὶς ἐν λάρνακι μετὰ τῶν συγγενῶν κατῴκησεν ἐν τῷ Σινάρῳ πεδίῳ.
γενώμεθα πνευματικοί, γενώμεθα ναὸς τέλειος τῷ θεῷ.
ἔχω εἰς τὸν Ἑρμίου λόγον περὶ πῆς τοπογραμματείας τοῦ νγ ἔτους χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ περὶ τῆς κωμογραμματείας ὁμοίως χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ
ἀποστερέσαι … ησας ἀλλά … τας κατὰ κοινόν … ἐπίσκεψιν ποιησάσθαι. … τούτων γὰρ γενομένων ἐσόμεθα βεβοηθημένοι ὑφʼ ὑμῶν. ἔρρωσθε. ἔτους θ Φαρμοῦθι κζ, ἐπιλέγματος ἀναγνωσθέντος τοῦ ὑπομνήματος ἐκρίθη
λ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως τετανὸς μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὐλὴ φαλάνθῳ ἀριστερῶι χαλκοῦ νομίσματος τάλαντα δέκα δύο, γίνεται τάλαντα ιβ, ἄτοκα, ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀπὸ μηνὸς Παῦνι ιθ. τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω
πιστός is an adjective meaning trustworthy or faithful, derived from the root πείθω. It describes both people and things, indicating reliability and trustworthiness, as seen in various New Testament passages like Matthew 24:45 and 2 Timothy 2:2. The word can also denote a believer, someone who trusts in God or is convinced of Jesus' resurrection. Notably, Liddell-Scott-Jones highlights its use in classical literature, while Moulton & Milligan note its rare active sense of 'trusting' in the New Testament.
πιστός, -ή, -όν
(< πείθω),
[in LXX chiefly for נֶאֱמָן;]
Pass., to be trusted or believed;
πιστός, -7, -όν, (πείθω [q. v-]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. mostly for 1232}; 1. trusty, faithful; of persons who show themselves faithful in the transaction of business, the execution of commands, or the discharge of official duties: δοῦλος, Mt. xxiv. 45; xxv. 21, 23; οἰκονόpos, Lk. xii. 42; 1 Co. iv. 2; διάκονος, Eph. vi. 21; Col. i. 7; iv. 7; ἀρχιερεύς, Heb. ii. 17; iii. 2; of God, abiding by his promises, 1 Co.i.9; x.13; 2Co.i. 18; 1 Th. v. 24; 2 Th. ii. 8; Heb. x. 23: xi. 11; 2 Tim. 1. 13; Avdneds 9: 1 Pet. 1v. 19% add, 1 Co.ave 17; Colsava 9s 1 Tim. i. 12; Heb. iii. 5; 1 Pet. v. 12; πιστὸς ἔν τινι, in a thing, Lk. xvi. 10-12; xix. 17; 1 Tim. iii. 11; ἐπί τι, Mt. xxv. 23; ἄχρι θανάτου, Rev. ii. 10. one who kept his plighted faith, Rev. ii. 13; worthy of trust; that can be relied on: 1 Co. vii. 25; 2 Tim. ii. 2; Christ is called μάρτυς ὁ πιστός, Rev. i. 5; with καὶ ἀληθινός added, Rev.…
Read the full entry →πιστός. For πιστός, ‘‘ faithful,” ‘‘ trustworthy,” as generally in the NT, cf. P Grenf II. 7312 (late iii/A.D.) (= Selections, p- 118) τ]αύτην παραδέδωκα τοῖς καλοῖς kal πιστοῖς ἐξ αὐτῶν τῶν νεκροτάφων εἰς τήρησιν, “1 have handed her over to the good and faithful men among the grave-diggers themselves that they may take care of her” (cf. Mt 2574), and P Oxy I. 4159 (iii/iv A.D.) ἁγνοὶ πιστοὶ σύνδικοι, “true and trustworthy advocates.” In a deed of sale of a slave, published by Eitrem (S#/avenkauf, Christiania, 1916), the slave is described as 27 πιστοῦ kal adpdcrov, ‘faithful and not given to running away.’’ A petitioner for release from prison οὕνεκα Tod θεοῦ kal τοῦ καλῶς ἔχοντος, “in the name of God and of fair play,’’ describes himself, P Petr II. 19(1a)4, as δοὺς τὰ πιστά, with reference apparently to certain required ‘‘ pledges”: cf. BGU IV. 115276 (B.C. 10) οὗ τὰ] πιστὰ (reading…
Read the full entry →πιστός (pistos) — faithful.
πιστός, ή, όν,
(πείθω):
__B passive, to be trusted or believed:
__B.I of persons, faithful, trusty, ἑταῖρος [Refs 8th c.BC+]: comparative -ότερος [Refs 5th c.BC+]: superlative πιστότατος [Refs 8th c.BC+] a trusted friend of P., Ergias cited in [Refs 4th c.BC+]; οἱ πιστοί, in Persia, trusty councillors, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τάδε Περσῶν πιστὰ καλεῖται [Refs 4th c.BC+]
__B.I.2 trustworthy, worthy of credit, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb, - τῶς καὶ ἀδόλως [Refs]
__B.I.3 genuine, π. Ἀταλάντης γόνος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Θηρικλέους π. τέκνον, of a cup, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; unmistakable, νόσοι πονηραὶ καὶ π. [LXX]
πιστός
pistos
from 3982; objectively, trustworthy; subjectively,
trustful:--believe(-ing, -r), faithful(-ly), sure, true.
see GREEK for 3982
πιστός, ή, όν
Adj
trustworthy, faithful, believing
πιστός pistos 67x
faithful, true, trusty, Mt. 24:45; 25:21, 23; Lk. 12:42; 2 Tim. 2:2; put in trust, 1 Cor. 7:25; true, veracious, Rev. 1:5; 2:13; credible, sure, certain, indubitable, Acts 13:34; 1 Tim. 1:15; believing, yielding belief and confidence, Jn. 20:27; Gal. 3:9; spc. a Christian believer, Acts 10:45; 16:1, 15; Read the full entry →
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
Faithful
As a designation of Christians, means full of faith, trustful, and not simply trustworthy (Acts 10:45; 16:1; 2 Cor. 6:15; Col. 1:2; 1 Tim. 4:3, 12; 5:16; 6:2; Titus 1:6; Eph. 1:1; 1 Cor. 4:17, etc.).
It is used also of God’s word or covenant as true and to be trusted (Ps. 119:86, 138; Isa. 25:1; 1 Tim. 1:15;
In many passages in the Bible, means "believing." Thus in Ga 3:9, believers are said to be blessed with Abraham, because of his preeminent distinction above all man for steadfast faith in God. This appellation is given in Scripture to true Christians, to indicate not only their saving faith in Christ, but their trustworthy and consistent Christian character, Ac 16:15 1Co 4:17 Eph 6:21 Col 4:9 1Pe 5:12. "A faithful saying" is one that cannot prove false, 1Ti 1:15 2Ti…
68 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 67 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 29 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὄντως γὰρ ἀναίσχυντος καὶ θρασεῖα ἡ αἴσθησις, ἣ ἐξουθενηθεῖσα ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ πατρὸς παρὰ τὸν πιστὸν ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ (ibid.
πολέμιον γὰρ σὸν οὐκ εἰδέναι ἔφασκε, πιστὸν δὲ ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα δοῦλον καὶ χιλίαρχον καὶ τὸ τούτων μεῖζον γαμβρόν τε ἤδη καὶ συγγενῆ.
καί: τὸ ὕδωρ αὐτοῦ πιστόν: βασιλέα μετὰ δόξης ὄψεσθε, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ ὑμῶν μελετήσει φόβον κυρίου
κέχρησαι τὸ κερμάτιον, οὐ δὲ φάσιν ἀπέστειλας ἐμοί. ἐγὼ γὰρ μή εἰ ἤδη ὅτι πιστὸς εἶ οὐκ ἂν ἔχρησά σοι. εἰδὼς τὴν σὴν πίστιν οὐδενὶ ἔδωκα τὸ γράμμα. ἄν
ὡς ἐπίτροπος · εἰ μὲν ηὕρηκες μίσθωμα αὐτῇ εἰς Διδύμους, ἀσφάλισον σεαυτῷ λίαν παρὰ πιστὸν ἄνθρωπον ἵνα μὴ αὐτὴν ὑβρίσωσιν· ἐὰν ποιῄσεις μοι μικρόν τι, ἀνταποδώσω σοι καὶ πάντοτε
μὲν ἔλθῃς ὑγιαίνουσα, οἴσεις μοι αὐτὴ τὸ τετράδερμα, εἰ δὲ μή, πέμψεις μοι διὰ πιστοῦ τινος ἐπεὶ χωρὶς αὐτοῦ οὐ δύναμαι μένειν. εὐχαριστῶ α … φησαπολ ἔρρωσο. τε προσα
The Greek word ἄχρι (i.e., *achri*) serves as both an adverb and a preposition, meaning 'until' or 'as far as.' It is used in various contexts, including time, space, and degree, and appears in multiple New Testament verses such as Galatians 3:19 and Hebrews 3:13. The entries indicate that it can also function as a conjunction, linking clauses.
ἄχρι (achri) — until.
ἄχρι
and ἄχρις (see. entry near the end):
I. adverb to the uttermost, τένοντε καὶ ὀστέα λᾶας ἀναιδὴς ἄχρις ἀπηλοίησεν[Refs 8th c.BC+]
I.2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄχρι πρὸς τὸν σκοπόν, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἄχρι ἐπὶ πολὺ τῶν πλευρῶν[Refs 4th c.BC+]: less frequently after the Noun, ἐς τέλος ἄχρις[Refs 1st c.BC+]adverb, ἄχρι πόρρω still farther, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. preposition with genitive, even to, as far as,
II.1. of Time, until, ἄχρι μάλα κνέφαος until deep in the night, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄχρι δὲ τούτου until then, [NT+6th c.BC+]continually, [Refs 1st c.AD+]
ἄχρι ἄχρις
achri
or achris akh'-rece; akin to 206 (through the idea of a terminus); (of
time) until or (of place) up to:--as far as, for, in(-to), till,
(even, un-)to, until, while. Compare 3360.
see GREEK for 206
see GREEK for 3360
ἄχρι
Adv
as far as, up to, until
ἄχρι adv. to the uttermost, utterly, Il.
after Hom., before Preps., ἄχρι εἰς . . ἄχρι πρὸς . . , Lat. usque ad . . , Xen., Luc.
prep. with gen. even to, as far as:
of Time, until, ἄχρι μάλα κνέφαος until deep in the night, Od.; ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας Dem.
of Space, as far as, even to, ἄχρι τῆς ἐσόδου Hdt.
of Degree, ἄχρι τούτου up to this point, Dem.; ἄχρι τοῦ μὴ πεινᾶν Xen.
as Conj., ἄχρι οὗ or ἄχρι alone:
of Time, Lat donec, until, so long as, ἄχρι οὗ ὅδε ὁ λόγος ἐγράφετο id. Xen.; ἄχρι ἄν with Subj., ἄχρι ἂν σχολάσηι till he should be at leisure, id. Xen.
of Space, so far as, id. Xen., Luc.
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
50 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 49 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
εἰ γοῦν οἱ ἀπὸ μονάδος ἄχρι τετράδος ἑξῆς συντεθεῖεν ἀριθμοί, δεκάδα γεννήσουσιν, ἥτις ὅρος τῆς ἀπειρίας τῶν ἀριθμῶν ἐστι, περὶ ὃν ὡς καμπτῆρα εἱλοῦνται καὶ ἀνακάμπτουσι.
οἱ δὲ πάντες ἀγαθοὶ φύντες γῆν τε τὴν αὐτὴν ἀστασίαστοι κατῴκησαν εὐδαιμονήσαντες μηδενὸς αὐτοῖς ἄχρι καὶ τελευτῆς δυσκόλου προσπεσόντος, σοφίαν τε τὴν περὶ τὰ οὐράνια καὶ τὴν τούτων διακόσμησιν ἐπενόησαν.
Ἄχρι τῆς ἀγνοίας, φησίν, οὐχ ἁμαρτάνει: ἐὰν δὲ γνῷ ὁ ἀνὴρ τὴν ἁμαρτίαν αὐτῆς καὶ μὴ μετανοήσῃ ἡ γυνή, ἀλλ̓ ἐπιμένῃ τῇ πορνείᾳ αὐτῆς καὶ συνζῇ ὁ ἀνὴρ μετ̓ αὐτῆς, ἔνοχος γίνεται τῆς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῆς καὶ κοινωνὸς τῆς μοιχείας αὐτῆς.
Ἁδριανοῦ Σεβαστοῦ, εἰς τὸ μὴ ἐξεῖναι αὐτῇ πωλεῖν μηδὲ ὑποτίθεσθαι ἑτέροις μηδʼ ἄλλως καταχρηματίζειν ἄχρι οὗ ἀπο-δώσει ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα Ταπιᾶμις τῷ Πακύσι τὰς τοῦ προκειμένου κεφαλαίου δραχμὰς ἐκ πλήρους.
ποῦ ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ. διὸ ἀξιοῦμεν μένειν παρὰ σοὶ ἐν καταχωρισμῶι τὸ ὑπόμνημα ἄχρι οὗ ὁ Ὡρίων ἐμφανὴς γένηται καὶ ἀχθῆναι τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸ παραστῆσαι αὐτόν
καθʼ ὧν πάντων οὐκ ἕξει τὴν ὁλοσχερῆ ἐξουσίαν τοῦ πωλεῖν ὑποτίθεσθαι οὐδὲ ἄλλως καταχρηματίσαι ἄχρι οὗ ἀποδῶι τὸ προκίμενον κεφάλαιον καὶ τοὺς τόκους· οἱ δὲ προγεγραμμένοι υἱοὶ Στοτοῆτις καὶ
θάνατος (thanatos) means 'death' and can refer to both natural and violent forms of death. It encompasses physical death, spiritual death, and even metaphorical uses, such as the death of Christ. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including imminent danger and eternal death. Notably, it is contrasted with ζωή (zoe), meaning 'life'.
θάνατος, -ου, ὁ (θνήσκω),
[in LXX chiefly for מָוֶת ,מוּת, sometimes דֶּבֶר;]
death;
θάνατος, -ov, 6, (θανεῖν); Sept. for ny) and ny, also for 727 pestilence [W. 29 note]; (one of the nouns often anarthrous, ef. W. § 19, 1s. v.; [B. § 124, 8¢.]; Grimm, Com. on Sap. p. 59); death; 1. prop. the death of the body, i. e. that separation (whether natural or violent) of the soul from the body by which the life on earth is ended: Jn. xi. 4, [13]; Acts ii. 24 [Trmrg. ἅδου] (on this see ddiv); Phil. ii. 27,30; Heb. vii. 23; ix. 15 sq.; Rev. ix. 6; xviii. 8; opp. to ζωή, Ro. viii. 38; 1 Co. iii. 22; 2Co.i. 9; Phil. i. 20; with the implied idea of future misery in the state beyond, 1 Co. xv. 21; 2 Tim. i. 10; Heb. ii. 14 sq.; 1. q. the power of death, 2 Co. iv. 12. Since the nether world, the abode of the dead, was conceived of as being very dark, χώρα καὶ σκιὰ θανάτου (ayy) is equiv. to the region of thickest darkness, i. e. figuratively, a region enveloped in the darkness of…
Read the full entry →θάνατος. For this common noun we may cite such passages as P Petr IIT. 36 (2)? τ]ὸν θάνατον ὑποκείμενον [ἐν] τῆι φυλακῆι διὰ τὴν ἔνδειαν, P Tebt I. 5% (B.c. 118) τοὺς δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιοῦντας θαν[άτωι ζ]ημιοῦσθαι, P Oxy III. 4727 (c. Α.Ὁ. 130) ἄλλοι πολλοὶ τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ζῆν προκρείναντες, 12. 11. 2370}. 36 (A.D. 186) ἡ δὲ κτῆσις μετὰ θάνατον τοῖς τέκνοις κεκράτηται, “but the right of ownership after their death has been settled upon the children” (Edd.). The wellknown inscr. at the entrance of the inner court of the Temple at Jerusalem, threatening all who were not Jews with the penalty of death for entering, ends—és 8’ ἂν ληφθῇ, ἑαυτῶι αἴτιος ἔσται διὰ τὸ ἐξακολουθεῖν θάνατον (OG/S 5087, i/A.D.). In a Latin papyrus containing military accounts, | P Fay rosiii 24 (c. a.p. 180), opposite the name Turbon a letter @ has been inserted, implying, according to the editors, that he has died.…
Read the full entry →θάνατος (thanatos) — death.
θάνᾰτος [θᾰ], ὁ,
(θνῄσκω) death, whether natural or violent, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τῶν ὑπαλευάμενος θάνατον the death threatened by them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θάνατόνδε to death, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; θανάτου τέλος, μοῖρα, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θανάτου πέρι καὶ ζωᾶς for life and death, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πόλεώς ἐστι θ., ἀνάστατον γενέσθαι it is its death, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γῆρας ζῶν θ. [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; θάνατον ἀποθνῄσκειν, τελευτᾶν, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
2. in Law, death-penalty, θάνατον καταγνῶναί τινος to pass sentence of death on one, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θανάτου δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς τοὺς ἐχθροὺς.. ἀγωνίσασθαι περὶ θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]; θ. τῆς ζημίας ἐπικειμένης the penalty is death…
θάνατος
thanatos
from 2348; (properly, an adjective used as a noun) death (literally or
figuratively):--X deadly, (be...) death.
see GREEK for 2348
θάνατος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
death
θάνατος θάνα^τος, ὁ, θνήσκω death, Hom., etc.; θ. τινος the death threatened by him, Od.; θάνατόνδε to death, Il., etc.
in attic, θάνατον καταγιγνώσκειν τινός to pass sentence of death on one, Thuc.; θανάτου κρίνεσθαι to be tried for one's life, id. Thuc.:—ellipt., τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ κεκοσμημένος (sc. στολήν) Hdt.; δῆσαί τινα τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτου (sc. δέσιν) id. Hdt.; τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις ἐπιτρέψαι περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν πλὴν θανάτου for any penalty short of death, Thuc.
pl. θάνατοι, kinds of death, Od.; or the deaths of several persons or even of one person, Trag.
as prop. n., Θάνατος Death, twin-brother of Sleep, Il.
= νεκρός, Anth.
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
(maweth; thanatos):
PHYSIOLOGICAL AND FIGURATIVE VIEW
The word "Death" is used in the sense of
(1) the process of dying (Ge 21:16);
(2) the period of decease (Ge 27:7);
(3) as a possible synonym for poison (2Ki 4:40);
(4) as descriptive of person in danger of perishing (Jud 15:18; "in deaths oft" 2Co 11:23). In this sense the shadow of death is a familiar expression in Job, the Psalms and the Prophets;
Death
May be simply defined as the termination of life. It is represented under a variety of aspects in Scripture: (1.) “The dust shall return to the earth as it was” (Eccl. 12:7).
(2.) “Thou takest away their breath, they die” (Ps. 104:29).
(3.) It is the dissolution of “our earthly house of this tabernacle” (2 Cor. 5:1); the “putting off this tabernacle” (2 Pet. 1:13, 14).
(4.) Being “unclothed” (2 Cor. 5:3, 4).
(5.) “Falling on sleep” (Ps. 76:5; Jer. 51:39;
Is taken in Scripture, first, for the separation of body and soul, the first death, Ge 25:11; secondly, for alienation from God, and exposure to his wrath, 1Jo 3:14, etc.; thirdly, for the second death, that of eternal damnation. Death was the penalty affixed to Adam’s transgression, Ge 2:17 3:19; and all his posterity are transgressors, and share the curse inflicted upon him. CHRIST is "our life." All believers share his life, spiritually and eternally; and though sin and bodily is taken away, and in the resurrection the last enemy shall be trampled under foot, Ro 5:12-21 1Co 15:1-58.
120 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 120 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 160 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὴν δεκάτην δ’ εἴ τις τελέσας κατὰ μέτρον ἵκοιτο, οὐκ ἂν ἄωρος ἐὼν μοῖραν ἔχοι θανάτου.
Ὡς δʼ ἀφικομένων τῶν παίδων Ἰάκωβος τὰ περὶ τὸν Ἰώσηπον ἔμαθεν, ὅτι μὴ μόνον εἴη τὸν θάνατον διαπεφευγὼς ἐφʼ ᾧ πενθῶν διῆγεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ζῇ μετὰ λαμπρᾶς εὐδαιμονίας βασιλεῖ συνδιέπων τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ τὴν ἅπασαν σχεδὸν ἐγκεχειρισμένος αὐτῆς ἐπιμέλειαν,
οἱ προφῆται, ἀπ̓ αὐτοῦ ἔχοντες τὴν χάριν, εἰς αὐτὸν ἐπροφήτευσαν: αὐτὸς δέ, ἵνα καταργήσῃ τὸν θάνατον καὶ τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀνάστασιν δείξῃ, ὅτι ὲν σαρκὶ ἕδει αὐτὸν φανερωθῆναι, ὑπέμεινεν,
ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐκ τούτου τῷ ζῆν κινδυνεύειν. ὅθεν, κύριε, εὐλαβῶς ἔχων τὸν περὶ τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ κινδυνον ἐπιδίδωμικαὶ ἀξιῶ κελεῦσαι ἀχθῆναι αὐτὸν ἐπὶ σὲ πρὸς τὸ τὸ ἀκόλουθον γείνεσθαι
μεσιτείας μου γεναμένης καὶ διέταξα τῷ υἱῷ μου Ἰσιδώρῳ πρὸ μιᾶς ἡμέρας μου τοῦ θανάτου εἴ τί μοι ὑπάρχει ἀγρῶν τε καὶ οἰκοπέδων καὶ χρυσία καὶ ἱμάτια καὶ
μεσιτείας μου γενομένης καὶ διέταξα τῷ υἱῷ μου Ἰσιδώρῳ πρὸ μιᾶς ἡμέρας μου τοῦ θανάτου εἴ τί μοι ὑπάρχει ἀγρῶν τε καὶ οἰκοπέδων καὶ χρυσία καὶ ἱμάτια καὶ
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
δίδωμι, transliterated as didōmi, means 'to give' and is used in a wide range of contexts, including bestowing, granting, and delivering. It appears frequently in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 4:9 and John 3:16. The word is built from a primary verb and has various forms and constructions, indicating its flexibility in usage.
δίδωμι,
[in LXX chiefly for נתן (53 words in all) ;]
to give—in various senses, acc. to context—bestow, grant, supply, deliver, commit, yield: absol., Ac 20:35; c. acc. rei et dat. pers., Mt 4:9 5:31, Jo 1:12, al. mult.; c. dat. pers., seq. ἐκ, Mt 25:8; id. c. gen. part.. Re 2:17; c. acc. pers., Jo 3:16, Re 20:13, al.; δεξιάς, Ga 2:9; φίλημα, Lk 7:45; γνῶσιν, Lk 1:77; κρίσιν, Jo 5:22; of seed yielding fruit, Read the full entry →
δίδωμι (διδῶ, Rev. iii. 9 LT WH; [δίδω Tr, yet see WH. App. p. 167]), 3 pers. plur. διδόασι (Rev. xvii. 13 [not Rec.]), impv. δίδου (Mt. v. 42 RG); impf. 3 pers. sing. ἐδίδου, 3 pers. plur. ἐδίδουν (ἐδίδοσαν, Jn. xix. 3 LT Tr WH [see ἔχω); fut. δώσω; 1 aor. ἔδωκα [2 pers. sing. -xes, Jn. xvii. 7 Trmrg., 8 Trmrg.; cf. reff. s. v. κοπιάω)], subjunc. δώσῃ [and δώσωμεν] fr. an imaginary indic. form ἔδωσα, [ Mk. vi. 37 T Trmrg.]; Jn. xvii. 2 (Tr mrg. WH δώσει) ; Rev. viii. 3 (LT Tr WH δώσει; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 720 sq.; B. 36 (31); W. 79 (76); [Veitch s. v. 618. fin., also Soph. Lex. s. v. and esp. Intr. p. 40; WH. App. p. 172]); pf. δέδωκα [on the interchange between the forms of the pf. and of the aor. in this verb ef. B. 199 (172)]; plpf. ἐδεδώκειν and without augm. [W. § 12, 9; B. 33 (29)] dedaxew, Mk. xiv. 44; and L txt. T Tr WH in Lk. xix. 15; 3 pers. plur. δεδώκεισαν, Jn. xi. 57; 2…
Read the full entry →δίδωμι structed by Kenyon, P Lond I. p. 2ff. For a specimen of their petitions see P Par 26 (B.C. 163-2), reproduced in Selections, p. 12 ff. It opens—Baordret Πτολεμαίῳ καὶ Βασιλίσσῃ Κλεοπάτρᾳ τῇ ἀδελφῇ, θεοῖς Φιλομήτορσι, χαίρειν. Θανὴς καὶ Taods δίδυμαι, αἱ λειτουργοῦσαι ἐν τῷ πρὸς Μέμφει μεγάλῳ Σαραπιείῳ κτὰ. From 20.15 Kal ἐκ τούτων καὶ τῶν προτοῦ γενηθεισῶν δ[ι]δύμων κομισαμένων τὰ ἑαυτῶν καθ᾽ ἡμέραν δέοντα, we learn that the Twins were there ex officio as twins, in connexion with some Dioscuric cultus: see Rendel Harris Soanerges, p. 272. From later documents it will be enough to quote P Oxy IIT. 533%® (ii/ili A.p.) εὔπατε Kal τοῖς διδύμοις ὅτι προνοήσζα]τε τοῦ κερματίου, “Ὑ16}1 the twins also to be careful about the small change” (Edd.). The frequency of Didymus as a proper name we compare the Latin Geminus and Gemellus (cf. for the latter the farmer whose correspondence at end…
Read the full entry →δίδωμι (didōmi) — to give.
δίδωμι,
[Refs 8th c.BC+] (late δίδω [Refs 3rd c.AD+]; late forms, 1st pers. plural διδόαμεν see reading in [Refs 1st c.AD+]; but thematic forms are frequently used, especially in Epic dialect and Ionic dialect, διδοῖς, διδοῖσθα, [Refs 8th c.BC+], διδοῖ [Refs 8th c.BC+], uncertain in Attic dialect, [Refs 6th c.BC+], Epic dialect δίδωθι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive διδόναι, also διδοῦν [Refs 6th c.BC+], Epic dialect διδοῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect δίδων [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; participle διδούς, Aeolic dialect δίδοις [Refs 7th c.BC+]imperfect ἐδίδουν -ους -ου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Epic dialect δίδου [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἐδίδοσαν [Refs 8th c.BC+] codices (ἀπ-), also ἔδιδον probably in [Refs]; Epic dialect iterative δόσκον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future δώσω [Refs], Epic dialect διδώσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; infinitive δωσέμεναι [Refs 8th…
Read the full entry →δίδωμι
didomi
a prolonged form of a primary verb (which is used as an alternative in
most of the tenses); to give (used in a very wide application,
properly, or by implication, literally or figuratively; greatly
modified by the connection):--adventure, bestow, bring forth, commit,
deliver (up), give, grant, hinder, make, minister, number, offer, have
power, put, receive, set, shew, smite (+ with the hand), strike (+
with the palm of the hand), suffer, take, utter, yield.
δίδωμι
v.
I offer, give
δίδωμι didōmi 415x
pluperfect, ἐδεδώκειν, to give, bestow, present, Mt. 4:9; 6:11; Jn. 3:16; 17:2, et al. freq.; to give, cast, throw, Mt. 7:6; to supply, suggest, Mt. 10:19; Mk. 13:11; to distribute alms, Mt. 19:21; Lk. 11:41; to pay tribute, etc., Mt. 22:17; Mk. 12:14; Lk. 20:22; to be the author or source of a thing, Read the full entry →
δίδωμι Redupl. from Root ΔΟ, Lat. do, dare. Orig. sense, to give, τί τινι Hom., etc.; in pres. and imperf. to be ready to give, to offer, id. Hom.
of the gods, to grant, κῦδος, νίκην, and of evils, δ. ἄλγεα, ἄτας, κήδεα id. Hom.; later, εὖ διδόναι τινί to provide well for . . , Soph., Eur.
to offer to the gods, Hom., etc.
with an inf. added, δῶκε τεύχεα θεράποντι φορῆναι gave him the arms to carry, Il.; διδοῖ πιεῖν gives to drink, Hdt., etc.
Prose phrases, δ. ὅρκον, opp. to λαμβάνειν, to tender an oath; δ. χάριν, ῀ χαρίζεσθαι, as ὀργῆι χάριν δούς having indulged his anger, Soph.;— λόγον τινὶ δ. to give one leave to speak, Xen.; but, δ. λόγον ἑαυτῶι to deliberate, Hdt.
c. acc. pers. to give over, deliver up, Hom., etc.
Verb-FAI-1S — Verb · future · active · indicative · first person · singularfuture active indicative — an action still to come.
V-FAI-1S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Future Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Singular
(nathan, yahabh, sum; didomi): "Give" is a very common word in the Old Testament. It is most frequently the translation of nathan, "to give" (Ge 1:29; 3:6; Ex 2:9; De 18,20, etc., over 800 instances); nathan is also translated "to give up" (De 23:14; Isa 43:6; Ho 11:8); of yahabh, "to give" (Ge 30:1; 1Ch 16:28 the King James Version). In Ps 55:22 we have the perfect with suffix, "Cast thy burden upon Yahweh," margin "what he hath given thee"; elsewhere it is…
414 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 86 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 414 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 985 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
Τῇ δὲ τετάρτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μετὰ τὴν γῆν τὸν οὐρανὸν ἐποίκιλλε διακοσμῶν, οὐκ ἐπειδὴ τοῦτον ἐν ὑστέρῳ γῆς ἔταττε, τῇ μὲν ἐλάττονι φύσει προνομίαν διδούς, τὴν δὲ κρείττονα καὶ θειοτέραν δευτερείων ἀξιῶν, ἀλλ’ εἰς ἔνδειξιν ἐναργεστάτην κράτους ἀρχῆς.
οὔτε γὰρ αὐτῷ ποτʼ ἂν γενέσθαι νοῦν ἀγαθὸν τῷ νομοθέτῃ ταύτης ἀπολειπομένῳ τῆς θέας, οὔτε τῶν γραφησομένων εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον οὐδὲν ἀποβήσεσθαι τοῖς λαβοῦσιν, εἰ μὴ πρὸ παντὸς ἄλλου διδαχθεῖεν, ὅτι πάντων πατήρ τε καὶ δεσπότης ὁ θεὸς ὢν καὶ πάντα…
ἐγνώρισεν γὰρ ἡμῖν ὁ δεσπότης διὰ τῶν προφητῶν τὰ παρεληλυθότα καὶ τὰ ἐνεστῶτα, καὶ τῶν μελλόντων δοὺς ἀπαρχὰς ἡμῖν γεύσεως, ὧν τὰ καθ̓ ἕκαστα βλέποντες ἐνεργούμενα, καθὼς ἐλάλησεν, ὀφείλομεν πλουσιώτερον καὶ ὑψηλότερον προσάγειν τῷ φόβῳ αὐτοῦ.
μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι· ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι, τὸν
μέμ μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι. ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι, τὸν
μέν μοι ὑγιαίνοντι τῶν ἐμαυτοῦ κύριον εἶναι, ἐὰν δέ τι ἀνθρώπινον πάθω, καταλείπω καὶ δίδωμι τὰ ὑπάρχοντά μοι ἔγγαιά τε καὶ ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι Ταθώτηι
σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.
σύ,
pron. of 2nd pers.,
thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also
Read the full entry →σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…
Read the full entry →σύ (su) — you.
σύ [ῠ],
thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →σύ
su
the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See
also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.
see GREEK for 4675
see GREEK for 4571
see GREEK for 4671
see GREEK for 5209
see GREEK for 5210
see GREEK for 5213
see GREEK for 5216
σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ
Pers.pr.
you
σύ sy 2x
you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6
Pron-2DS — Personal pronoun · second person · dative · singulardative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular.
P-2DS Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Dative Number: Singular
3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.
παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν
η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ
παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
στέφανος, or stephanos, is derived from the verb meaning 'to encircle.' It refers to a crown or garland, typically awarded for victory in public games, but also symbolizes honor and glory. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to rewards for righteousness and eternal life, as seen in passages like James 1:12 and 2 Timothy 4:8. Some lexicons note a distinction between στέφανος as a victory crown and διάδημα as a royal crown, though this distinction may not always be strictly observed.
We must not confound these words because our English ‘crown’ stands for them both. I greatly doubt whether anywhere in classical literature στέφανος is used of the kingly, or imperial, crown. It is the crown of victory in the games, of civic worth, of military valour, of nuptial joy, of festal gladness—woven of oak, of ivy, of parsley, of myrtle, of olive, or imitating in gold these leaves or others—of flowers, as of violets or roses (see Athenzeus, xv. 9-33); the ‘wreath,’ in fact, or the ‘ garland,’ the German ‘ Kranz’ as distinguished from ‘ Krone ;’ but never, any more than ‘corona’ in Latin, the emblem and sign of royalty. The διάδημα was this βασιλείας γνώρισμα, as Lucian calls it (Pisc. 35 ; cf. Xenophon, Cyr. vill. 3.13; Plutarch, De Frat. Am. 18); being properly a white linen band or fillet, ‘tenia’ or ‘ fascia’ (Curtius, iii. 8), encircling the brow; so that no language is…
Read the full entry →στέφανος, -ου, ὁ
(< στέφω, to encircle),
[in LXX chiefly for עֲטָרָה ;]
that which surrounds or encompasses (as a wall, a crowd: Hom., al.).
a crown, i.e. the wreath, garland or chaplet given as a prize for victory, as a festal ornament, or as a public honour for distinguished service or personal worth (so to sovereigns, especially on the occasion of a παρουσία, q.v.; cf. Deiss., LAE, 372 ff.; on its use in LXX for the golden crown of royalty (prop., διάδημα, q.v., cf. Hort and Mayor on Ja 1:12): Mt 27:29, Mk 15:17, Jo 19:2, 5, I Co 9:25, Re 4:4, 10 6:2 9:7 12:1 14:14. Metaph.: Phl 4:1, Re 3:11; τ.…
στέφανος, -ov, 6, (στέφω [to put round; ef. Curtius § 224]), Sept. for Mwy, [fr. Hom. down], a crown (with which the head is encircled) ; a. prop. as a mark of royal or (in general) exalted rank [such pass. in the Sept. as 2S. xii. 30; 1 Chr. xx. 2; Ps. xx. (xxi.) 4; Ezek. xxi. 26; Zech. vi. 11, 14, (yet ef. 2 S.i. 10 Compl, Lag.), perhaps justify the doubt whether the distinction betw. στέφανος and διάδημα (q.v-) was strictly observed in Hellenistic Grk.]: Mt. xxvii. 29; Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 2, 5; Rev. iv.4, 10; vi. 2; ix. 7; xiv. 14; with a gen. of the material, ἀστέρων δώδεκα, Rev. xii.1; the wreath or garland which was given as a prize to victors in the public games [cf. BB. DD. 5. v. Games]: 1 Co. ix. 25, ef. 2 Tim. ii. 5. b. metaph. a. the eternal blessedness which will be given asa prize to the genuine servants of God and Christ: 6 τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος, the crown (wreath)…
Read the full entry →στέφανος. From denoting a “ garland” or “‘ wreath” generally, στέφανος came to denote a ‘‘ crown of victory,’’ and as such was applied by Paul to his converts, as in 1 Thess 2.5. It should be noted, however, that the distinction between στέφανος, ‘“‘crown of victory” (*‘ Kranz”’) and διάδημα, “crown of royalty” (‘‘ Krone”) must not be pressed too far as by Trench Sy. § xxiii., for στέφανος is not infrequently used in the latter sense: see Mayor’s note on Jas 17%, and add from our sources the use of στέφανος to denote the “crown-tax ’” (aurum coronarium) for the present made to a king on his accession or other important occasion, e.g. P Petr 11. 39(e)it 33 (iii/B.c.) (as amended Wilcken Ostr. 1. p. 275) ἄλλου (sc. στεφάνου) παρουσίας, P Cairo Zen I. 59036 (B.C. 257) where 3000 drachmae are collected as © στέφανος τῶι βασιλεῖ, and P Fay 14° (B.C. 124) ot προκεχιρισμένοι πράκτορες τοῦ…
Read the full entry →στέφανος (stephanos) — crown.
στέφᾰνος, ὁ,
(στέφω) that which surrounds or encompasses, πάντῃ γάρ σε περὶ σ. πολέμοιο δέδηεν the circling fight, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the wall round a town, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; καλλίπαις σ. circle of fair children, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. crown, wreath, chaplet, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; δάφνας σ. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ῥόδινος, ῥοδόεις, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; σ. εἴρειν, πλέκειν, ἀνείρειν, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; θεῖσα ἀμφὶ βοστρύχοις[Refs 5th c.BC+]; μύρα, στεφάνους ἑτοίμασον for a feast, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; hung at the door on festive occasions, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
II. b in plural, οἱ σ. the garland-market, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
στέφανος
stephanos
from an apparently primary stepho (to twine or wreathe); a chaplet (as
a badge of royalty, a prize in the public games or a symbol of honor
generally; but more conspicuous and elaborate than the simple fillet,
1238), literally or figuratively:--crown.
see GREEK for 1238
στέφανος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
a crown, garland
στέφανος stephanos 18x
that which forms an encirclement; a crown, Mt. 27:29; Rev. 4:4, 10; wreath, conferred on a victor in the public games, 1 Cor. 9:25; met. a crown, reward, prize, 2 Tim. 4:8; Jas. 1:12; a crown, ornament, honor, glory
στέφανος στέφα^νος, ὁ, στέφω properly, that which surrounds, στ. πολέμοιο the circling crowd of fight, Il.; of the wall round a town, Pind.; καλλίπαις στ. a circle of fair children, Eur.
a crown, wreath, garland, chaplet, Hes., etc.: esp. at the public games, a crown of victory, Pind., Hdt., etc.:— these prize-crowns were mostly of leaves, of κότινος at the Olympic games, δάφνη at the Pythian, σέλινον at the Nemean, κισσός or πίτυς at the Isthmian.
generally, the meed of victory, the prize, victory, like Lat. palma, Soph.; στέφανον προτιθέναι to propose a prize, Thuc.
generally, a crown of glory, an honour, glory, Inscr. ap. Hdt.:— a crown as a badge of office or distinction, Dem.
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
kroun: The word crown in the Old Testament is a translation of five different Hebrew words, and in the New Testament of two Greek words. These express the several meanings, and must be examined to ascertain the same.
1. In Hebrew:
The five Hebrew words are as follows:
(1) qodhqodh, from qadhadh;
(2) zer, from zarar;
(3) nezer, or nezer, both from nazar;
(4) aTarah, from `atar;
(5) kether, from kathar.
(1) Qodhqodh means "the crown of the head," and is also rendered in the King James Version "top of the head," "scalp," "pate." It comes from qadhadh, meaning "to shrivel up," "contract," or bend the body or neck through courtesy. Both the Revised Version (British and American) and the American Standard Revised Version, in De 28:35 and 33:16, translation it "crown" instead of "top" as in the King James Version. Jacob in his prophecy concerning…
Crown
(1.) Denotes the plate of gold in the front of the high priest’s mitre (Ex. 29:6; 39:30). The same Hebrew word so rendered (ne’zer) denotes the diadem worn by Saul in battle (2 Sam. 1:10), and also that which was used at the coronation of Joash (2 Kings 11:12).
(2.) The more general name in Hebrew for a crown is ’atarah, meaning a “circlet.” This is used of crowns and head ornaments of divers kinds, including royal crowns. Such was the crown taken from the king of Ammon by David (2 Sam. 12:30). The crown worn by the Assyrian kings was a high mitre, sometimes adorned with flowers. There are sculptures also representing the crowns worn by the early Egyptian and…
This ornament, which is both ancient and universal, probably originated from the fillets used to prevent the hair from being dishevelled by the wind. Such fillets are still common; they gradually developed into turbans, which by the addition of ornamental or precious materials assumed the dignity of mitres or crowns. Both the ordinary priests and the high priest wore them. The crown was a symbol of royalty, and was worn by kings, (2 Chronicles 23:11) and also by queens. (Esther 2:17) The head-dress of bridegrooms, (Ezekiel 24:17; Isaiah 61:10) Bar. 5:2, and of women, (Isaiah 3:20) a head-dress of great splendor, (Isaiah 28:5) a wreath of flowers, (Proverbs 1:9; 4:9) denote…
There are two distinct Hebrew terms rendered crown. The one represents such headdresses as we should designate coronet, band, miter, tiara, garland, etc. The other is generally applied to the headdresses of kings.
The former was a simple fillet or diadem around the head, variously ornamented. Newly-married persons of both sexes wore crowns on their wedding-day, So 3:11 Eze 16:12.
The crowns of kings were sometimes white fillets, bound round the forehead, the ends falling back on the neck; or were made of gold tissue, adorned with jewels. That of the Jewish high priest was a fillet, or diadem, tied with a ribbon of a hyacinth color, Ex 28:36 39:30. Occasionally the crown was of pure gold, and was worn by kings,
18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 25 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὴν ὀφιομάχον οὖν γνώμην ἀντίταττε καὶ κάλλιστον ἀγῶνα τοῦτον διάθλησον καὶ σπούδασον στεφανωθῆναι κατὰ τῆς τοὺς ἄλλους ἅπαντας νικώσης ἡδονῆς καλὸν καὶ εὐκλεᾶ στέφανον, ὃν οὐδεμία πανήγυρις ἀνθρώπων ἐχορήγησεν.
ἐπῆν τε ἐσχάρα χρυσεία ὑπερανεστῶσα ἔχουσα κατὰ γωνίαν ἑκάστην στέφανον καὶ τοῦτον δʼ ἐκπεριοδεύοντα χρύσεον, ᾗ καὶ κρίκοι καὶ σκυταλίδες προσῆσαν, αἷς κατὰ τὰς ὁδοὺς ὑπὸ τῶν ἱερέων ἐφέρετο.
Ἐκέλευσε δὲ ὁ ἄγγελος κυρίου στεφάνους ἐνεχθῆναι.
παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .
τὸ θεοῖς μόνοις δ ταύτην τὴν τιμὴν ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπων δικαίως ἀπονέμεσθαι, καὶ τὸν χρυσοῦν στέφανον ἔπεμψά γε χαρισθήσεσθαι, μὴ βουλόμενος ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς ἡγεμονίας ἐπιβαρεῖν ὑμᾶς. ὅσα δὲ εἴχετε
ἀπογραφόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς αὐτῆς κώμης ὀμνύω Νέρωνα Κλαύδιον Καίσαρα Σεβαστὸν Γερμανικὸν Αὐτοκράτορα μηδὲν ἐψεῦσθαι. Στέφανος Σαραπίωνος τοῦ Τρύφωνος ὀμώμοκατὸν ὅρκον. … νις ἔγραψα ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ. ἔτους ιγ Νέρωνος
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ζωή (zōē) means 'life' and is derived from the verb ζάω (zaō). It encompasses natural life, spiritual existence, and the life of the kingdom of God, contrasting with death. The New Testament uses it to express both physical and spiritual life, as seen in verses like Luke 16:25 and John 6:51. Moulton & Milligan note that in Biblical Greek, ζωή carries a nobler connotation than the classical term for life.
ζωή, -ῆς, ἡ (ζάω),
[in LXX chiefly for חַיִּים;]
life (in Hom., Hdt., = βίος, q.v.; later, existence, vita quâ vivimus, as distinct from βίος, vita quam vivimus; opp. to θάνατος);
ζωή. P Lond 177 (A.D. 40-1) (= ΤΙ. p. 168) ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς ζωῆς note ad loc. τὺ. γλυκύς sub fin. In contrast to the classical usage in which βίος is the ethical term (see further s.v.), the ‘nobler’ connotation is attached in Biblical Greek to ζωή, which is generally used as equivalent to “the very highest blessedness’’: see Trench Syv. p. S6ff., and cf. Hort Asean Lectures, pp. 98 ff., 189 ff., for an important discussion on the Biblical doctrine of Life. In ZV7W xii. p. 228 ff. Burkitt treats the relation of ζωή to hayyim. . The noun survives in MGr. ζών P Petr I. 1412 (B.c. 237) τὴν ζώνην θωρακίτίου, “the girdle of a corslet-armed soldier”” (Ed.). In P Oxy IIL. 4964, a marriage contract of A.D. 127, the dowry of the
ζωή (zōē) — life.
ζωή
(ζωιή (probably an error) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], Doric dialect ζωά: Ionic dialect and poetry ζόη, [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect ζόα: Aeolic dialect ζοΐα [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: ἡ:— living, i.e. one's substance, property, ἦ γάρ οἱ ζ. γ᾽ ἦν ἄσπετος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τοὶ δὲ ζωὴν ἐδάσαντο[Refs]; τὴν ζόην ποιέεσθαι or καταστήσασθαι ἀπὸ or ἐκ.. to get one's living by.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. after [Refs 8th c.BC+], life, existence, opposed to death, [Refs 7th c.BC+]; θανάτου πέρι καὶ ζωᾶς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ζόας (ζωᾶς codices) βιοτά [Refs 5th c.BC+] mylife! [LXX+4th c.BC+]; μετὰ τὴν μίαν ζ. πολλαὶ ζ. [Refs 4th c.AD+]
3. way of life, ζόην ἔζωον τὴν αὐτήν [Refs 5th c.BC+]
ζωή
zoe
from 2198; life (literally or figuratively):--life(-time). Compare
5590.
see GREEK for 2198
see GREEK for 5590
ζωή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
life
ζωή ζάω a living, i. e. one's means of life, substance, Od.; τὴν ζόην ποιεῖσθαι ἀπό or ἔκ τινος to get one's living by . . , Hdt., etc.
life, existence, Tyrtae., Trag., etc.
a way of life, Hdt.
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · femininegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
lif (chayyim, nephesh, ruach, chayah; zoe, psuche, bios, pneuma):
I. THE TERMS
II. THE OLD TESTAMENT TEACHING
1. Popular Use of the Term
2. Complexity of the Idea
III. IN THE APOCRYPHA
IV. IN THE NEW TESTAMENT
1. In the Synoptic Gospels
2. In the Fourth Gospel
3. In the Ac of the Apostles
4. In the Writings of Paul
5. In the Writings of John
6. In the Other Books of the New Testament
LITERATURE
I. The Terms.
Of the Hebrew terms, chayah is the verb which means "to live," "to have life," or the vital principle, "to continue to live," or "to live prosperously." In the Piel it signifies "to give life, or preserve, or quicken and restore life." The Hiphil is much like the Piel. The noun hayyim generally used in the plural is an abstract noun meaning "life," i.e. the possession of the vital principle with its energies and activities. Nephesh often means "living being" or "creature." Sometimes it has the…
Life
Generally of physical life (Gen. 2:7; Luke 16:25, etc.); also used figuratively (1) for immortality (Heb. 7:16); (2) conduct or manner of life (Rom. 6:4); (3) spiritual life or salvation (John 3:16, 17, 18, 36); (4) eternal life (Matt. 19:16, 17; John 3:15); of God and Christ as the absolute source and cause of all life (John 1:4; 5:26, 39; 11:25; 12:50).
In the Bible, is either natural, Ge 3:17; spiritual, that of the renewed soul, Ro 8:6; or eternal, a holy and blissful immortality, Joh 3:36 Ro 6:23. Christ is the great Author of natural life, Col 1:16; and also of spiritual and eternal life; Joh 14:6 6:47. He has purchased these by laying down his own life; and gives them freely to his people, Joh 10:11,28. He is the spring of all their spiritual life on earth, Ga 2:20; will raise them up at the last day; and…
136 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 135 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 130 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὸ μὲν γὰρ ὠνόμασε θεοῦ, διότι ζωτικώτατον τὸ πνεῦμα, ζωῆς δὲ θεὸς αἴτιος, τὸ δὲ φῶς φησιν ὅτι ὑπερβαλλόντως καλόν (Gen.
ἐν τούτοις δʼ εἶναι καὶ τῆς ζωῆς τὸ φυτὸν καὶ ἄλλο τὸ τῆς φρονήσεως, ᾗ διεγινώσκετο τί εἴη τὸ ἀγαθὸν καὶ τί τὸ κακόν.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
τῆι οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ σκεύη τε καὶ ἕτερα τῇ μητρὶ ἡμῶν Ταοννώφρι ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς ζωῆς αὐτῆς χρόνον. ἐν δὲ τῷ μεταξὺ καὶ τῆς μητρὸς ἡμῶν τελευτησάσης καὶ ἡμῶν ὀφειλόντων
ἐτῶν τεσσαράκοντα … … μετὰ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ τελευτὴν πρὸ μὲν τ … … … Ζωὴν καὶ Ταυ … … … ος πρὸς ἑκαστ … … ς δυσὶ Εὐδαιμον
τω τὸν αὐτὸν πατέρα σου τῆς ὠνουμένης ἐχειν ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς ζωῆς ἑαυτοῦ χρόνον … … τῶν δηλουμένων ὑπαρχόντων πάντων κατ’ ἔτος προσόδους πάσας μετὰ τὰ